ENHANCING OPERATIONS OF VIDEO TAPE CASSETTE PLAYERS

Abstract: Operation of a video cassette player (10) is facilitated by providing a vertical blanking interval decoder (60a) which decodes information such as title, date, time and length of broadcast programs and utilizing the information in providing a directory of the programs (33a) as well as control of the VCR. The VCR is also provided with a VBI encoder (60b) for inserting control as well as directory information into the tape, either in portions of the video track (13) or in the control track (11).

Description: ENHANCING OPERATIONS OF VIDEO TAPE CASSETTE PLAYERS Cross Reference to Related Application This is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 08/014,541, filed February 8, 1993, which is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 08/001,125, filed January 5, 1993, which is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 07/833,607, filed May 7, 1992, which is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 07/817,723, filed January 1, 1992, which is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 07/805,844, filed December 5, 1991, which is a continuation-in-part of application Serial No. 07/747,127, filed August 19, 1991, the subject matter of which is incorporated herein by this reference. Field Of The Invention In one aspect, this invention is related to means and method for facilitating management, storage and retrieval of programs on a cassette of magnetic tape. In another aspect, this invention is related to maintaining current information about a tape in a magnetic tape cassette and more particularly to maintaining current information about such a tape using a magnetic tape reader/recorder, and magnetic tape cassettes therefor. Background Of The Invention Two general methods for long term mass storage of data are known; random access and sequential access. The random access method uses long playing (LP) record players, compact disc (CD) drives and video disc drives for consumer use, and hard disc drives, floppy disc drives and optical disc drives for use with computers. In all, information is accessed at random by moving a playing head directly over the desired playing area of the stored media. A. Problems With Serial Storage Devices In the sequential method, stored information can only be accessed sequentially. The sequential method uses audio tape drives, video tape drives and digital audio tape drives for general consumer use and digital tape drives and tape backup cassette drives for use with computers and analog tape drives for instrumentation purposes. All of these devices use magnetic tape as the stored media. The big advantage of tape drives is low cost compared with random access devices. The disadvantages and problems of using magnetic tape are three-fold. 1. To go to a particular location on tape, the tape must be either advanced or rewound in a serial or sequential manner. Unless forward or reverse operations can be performed at very high speed, this can be a time consuming process. 2. The exact contents and location of records on the tape are not known. Random access devices can record (usually at the outermost tracks) an index of the content at the beginning of the disc and anytime the index information needs to be accessed, the read or write head simply skips over to read the index. For magnetic tape, even if the index is recorded in a reserved area at the beginning of the tape, as is presently done in some video tape or computer tape backup systems, its usefulness is limited, due to the time required to rewind the tape all the way to the beginning, assuming the tape is not at the beginning when the need arises to search for the index. Owners of large numbers of tapes desire to place titles on the tapes to enable rapid identification of the program thereon. Usually titling is done by hand writing a title on a label on the tape or its box. However, the tape can become separated from the box, or the label may fall off. Some tape owners repeatedly record over the same tape and prefer not to use permanent labels. Computer tapes may contain hundreds of records or files and handwriting or updating the index onto the box is not practical. 3. The absolute current location of the tape is not known. Most tape drives have tape counters which only indicate relative location. For example, if a tape cassette is played and then removed from a tape drive without rewinding, the next time the cassette is inserted and played by a tape drive, the absolute location of the tape in the cassette will no longer be known. Attempts have been made to overcome this problem by writing absolute address marks onto the tape. For example, some recent video tapes use the VHS Address Search System (VASS) whereby absolute address marks are written at 1 minute intervals onto the control track of a VHS tape. In computer backup of hard discs by tape, the streaming mode is usually used where a constant stream of data blocks (usually 5 2 bytes) are written onto the tape, each block being usually preceded by one or two address bytes. Thus, absolute addressing is available but not yet universally used on tape. Knowing the absolute address is important. For example, assume that there are 5 programs (or records) on a tape and each of their starting addresses is known and a user desires to go to the starting location of program 4. Without knowing the absolute address of where the tape is currently positioned, the user or the drive has no way of knowing whether to rewind or fast forward the tape to reach the desired record. In order for tape drives to compete against random access devices it is important that these three problems be either overcome or ameliorated. £. Providing Program Titles Placing a descriptive title on the tape presents another problem. Video titling is usually known and recorded on a leader portion of the tape. Ordinarily, the title is computer-generated and recorded in a sequence of regular video frames, rather than on the control track. If multiple copies of the tape are made, the quality of the title drops off drastically. Also, the title cannot be conveniently edited without re-recording the sequence of frames. Prior art systems for applying such titles are either expensive or cumbersome. Professional video tiding systems include the well-known Chyron system and many others. Typically these systems include a complete computer, a complex, high-resolution character generator, a special effects generator for making shadows, italics and other effects, and a video interface to generate a video signal. Such systems are too expensive and complicated for the home video market. Some videocassette recorders (VCRs) and camcorders are equipped with simple character generators for displaying simple block letters and numbers, either superimposed over a recorded video signal or recorded and mixed with the picture signal. A typical camcorder application is adding characters representing the recording date and time to a video signal as it is being recorded, thereby adding a "date stamp." In VCRs, the character generator can be used to show programming information such as channel, date, and time on screen as the VCR is being programmed to record programs at a future date. However, currently there is no simple way to use the VCR character generator as a titling device. In "Recommended Practice For Line 21 Data Services, Part Seven, Extended Data Service Packets", Draft EIA-608, October 12, 1992, there is suggestion of using VBI line 21, field 2 to send information such as program title and type along with the broadcast program. Yet, the possible use of such information for facilitating operation of a videocassette recorder, such as providing a title for a recorded program, is never suggested. £ TO Edi ing Another problem with prior art titling systems is data input and editing. With Chyron systems, a full-size typewriter-style keyboard is used which is inappropriate for home use and slow for poor typists. Editing of a title is impractical with most home-generated titles, because the title is recorded as a video image on the tape. Thus, the prior art fails to provide a convenient means for generating, storing, and editing video titles for use with sequentially-stored magnetic tape. Users of home video equipment would likewise appreciate a system using internal character-generator hardware and VCR remote controls, thereby precluding the need for complex or expensive hardware to generate titles. It is an object of the invention that the addressing system provide a fast and accurate way of searching for the starting points of the programs. It is a further object that the addressing system determine the current position on the tape and provide a means of homing in to the destination address, during a search. It is yet another object of the address system to provide a means for accounting for the lengths of programs as they are recorded or modified. It is an object of the invention to have a memory that is randomly accessible for storing the directory. It is another object of the invention that the directory be changeable without degrading the quality of the recorded information on the tape. It is an object of the invention to provide a program guide that is broadcasted to the user and which provides current scheduling and descriptive information that includes special events which are scheduled on short notice. It is a further object that the program guide be usable for timer programming a Indexing VCR with minimal interaction by the user so that the user finds time shifting for viewing programs easier. It is yet another object that the broadcaster can provide increase the viewing of programs broadcasted during traditional off-hours. It is an object of the invention to have an indexing VCR with greater reliability and utility and at a lower cost than the Moving Head System. Summary of the Invention The invention provides, in a magnetic tape cassette reader/recorder, a method and apparatus for maintaining current information, such as a directory of recorded programs, about a tape in a magnetic tape cassette. The availability of the program directory can greatly facilitate operation of the tape cassette reader/recorder. For example, with a program directory, a user can perform an erase operation of a taped program by simply indicating on the directory that the program can be over-written and/or no longer accessible; or a recording operation by selecting from the directory a proper tape segment to perform the record operation without having to go through the tape to find the right spot. In brief, the availability of a program directory will eliminate much of the frustration that has been felt for so long by so many users of tape devices such as VCRs. Different embodiments of the present invention are disclosed in the specification for storing current information about a tape. For example, in one embodiment, the information is kept in a secondary memory carried on the exterior of a tape cassette. According to one implementation of the above embodiment, the secondary memory is a storage medium carried on the cassette. The storage medium preferably comprises a magnetic layer and an adhesive layer for affixation of the storage medium to the housing of the cassette. A stationary magnetic head/sensor is provided on the VCR to access the current information stored on the magnetic layer. The method of accessing the current information comprises the steps of reading the content on the magnetic layer after commencement of the insertion of such cassette in the reader/recorder, and causing the magnetic layer to be updated with current information about the tape therein whenever such cassette is ejected from the reader /recorder. According to another implementation of the above embodiment, the secondary memory is also a magnetic layer carried on the cassette and preferably a magnetic layer affixed to the housing of the cassette. However, the magnetic head/sensor for reading/writing data on the magnetic layer is movable over the magnetic layer. Under such implementation, information about the tape can be read and written with more freedom than the above implementation which uses a stationary head. According to another implementation of the above embodiment, the secondary memory for storing information of the tape is a semiconductor memory carried on d e cassette. Preferably, the semiconductor memory has serial input/output so that the number of contact points for communicating addresses and data between the cassette and a VCR is minimized. Advantageously, storage of information into the semiconductor memory can occur at any preferred time between the update and ejection of the tape. According to another embodiment of the present invention, directory information of a tape is recorded on the tape itself. The advantage of the embodiment is that the invention can be practiced without modification to the tape or its housing. In one implementation of this embodiment, directory information is written on the video track of the tape in the vertical blanking intervals (VBI) of recorded video signals. In another implementation, directory information is written on the control track of the tape. Preferably, a marker is formed on the tape to uniquely identify the position of a current directory. Also preferably, a first marker is recorded on tape in close proximity to a current directory when the directory is recorded on the tape. The tape is searched for a directory with the first marker. A second marker is recorded on the tape in close proximity to the first marker when the current directory is read. Alternatively, a marker may be recorded on the tape in close proximity to a current directory when the directory is recorded on the tape. The tape is searched for a current directory with the marker in close proximity thereto. The marker is erased when the directory is read. Also, the current tape position may be read from the housing of the cassette during insertion of the cassette into the reader/recorder. A current position of the tape may be written on the housing of the cassette during removal of the cassette from the reader/recorder. In one embodiment, the directory is erased from the tape immediately after the step of reading the directory. In another embodiment, the reader/recorder re-positions the tape in the cassette, after reading the directory and prior to removal of the cassette, to a position such that the directory will be read out by the reader/recorder upon reinsertion of the cassette in the reader/recorder and prior to reading by the reader/recorder of one of the records from the tape. In still another embodiment, the tape is not rewound after the directory is read and prior to removal of the cassette; however, the tape is read for the directory in a reverse direction when it is reloaded. Preferably there is recorded on the tape in association with the directory, a current position of the tape at which the reader/recorder will commence reading the tape upon reinsertion of the cassette in the reader /recorder. Also preferably, when reading the directory from the tape, the current position is also read from the tape and a representation of the current position is stored in the memory. Preferably, the current position in the memory is updated as the tape is being moved for reading or writing and the updated position may be recorded on d e tape. In still another embodiment of the present invention, directory information of a tape is stored in a random access memory located in the VCR. An identification (e.g. a volume label) is written on the tape whereby the corresponding directory information can be retrieved from the random access memory when the tape is loaded into the VCR. Index information are provided on the tape to facilitate searching of programs recorded thereon and positioning the tape to selected programs. According to one implementation, the index information is written at predetermined space intervals on the tape. The index information is represented by the value of the tape reel counter at the time the information is written. In one specific implementation, the index information is written onto the control track. In another specific implementation, the index information is written onto the VBI portions of the video track. In another implementation, a cue signal is written at the beginning of each program. The address of a program is represented by its sequential position relative to other programs on the tape. A program under this implementation is located by counting the cue signals encountered during either a fast forward or a rewind operation, until the appropriate number of cue signals are encountered. Different implementations are provided to further enhance the creation, maintenance and usefulness of the program directory. For example, in one embodiment, a program title, forming one part of the directory, is entered using controls on a jog shuttle remote control of the recorder/reader as an input device. A representation of an alphanumeric keyboard is displayed on a monitor screen by a character generator in the recorder/reader under control of the controller. Arrow buttons or a jog shuttle knob on the remote control can be used to select individual characters forming words in the program title. After the complete title is composed by a user it is saved in the directory. In another embodiment, a scrollable character is displayed instead of a keyboard representation. The arrow buttons or jog shuttle knob cause the character to change by stepping sequentially through the alphabets/numerals until a desired character is located. In another embodiment, the controller is coupled to a decoder for decoding data (e.g. a program title) communicated in die VBI portions of a broadcast television signal. The decoded data is fed to the directory in the memory and also is displayed on a monitor screen. The displayed data can then be edited using controls on a jog shuttle knob of a VCR remote control. In one specifically contemplated embodiment, the decoder decodes data from line 21, field 2 of the VBI. In another embodiment, the data communicated in d e VBIs include data, such as a program title, which can be used to detect extension of a program beyond its scheduled time, thereby causing the VCR to continue recording the program. In yet another embodiment, auxiliary information of a first program, such as the channel-date-time-length of a related second program is broadcasted in the VBI of the first program. In response to a user input, the auxiliary information is retrieved from d e VBI and used for automatically setting the VCR to record the related second program. In yet another embodiment, the auxiliary information are text data relating to die first program. Under die embodiment, die VCR has means responsive to user input for storing die text data in a memory so that they can be displayed at selected time. In another embodiment, a library containing the directories of a plurality of selected tapes is stored in the VCR. The availability of the library facilitate searching of programs among the plurality of tapes. In still another embodiment, broadcast programs are classified into different categories. The identification of die category of a broadcast program is broadcasted in its VBI. According to the embodiment, die category identification is retrieved from the VBI and stored as part of the directory information, which can later be used to facilitate searching of a specific category of programs from an archive of tapes. In a preferred embodiment, a hybrid VCR system is capable of detecting the address and d e tape identification number (TLD) from either the control track or the VBI of a video tape and identifying die type of tape therefrom. A first type of tape is a home recorded tape (HR tape) in which the directory diereof is stored in a RAM and die TTD and the address are stored in die control track in a first embodiment and in d e VBI in a second embodiment. A second type of tape is a prerecorded tape (PR tape) from a publisher in which the directory is stored in the VBI and die addresses are stored in a similar manner to die HR tapes. A third type of tape is a retroactively indexed tape (RI tape) which was previously recorded without an index and to which an index is being added. A directory is created in d e RAM and die TID and addresses are recorded in the control track. The address is determined from d e location of the recording on die tape as a distance from the beginning of the tape. In a first embodiment, d e address is determined by counting die spindle rotation either by counting the number of pulses reflected from light reflective lines on the spindle or calculating the length from the number of sync pulses recorded on die tape. In a second embodiment, d e distance is determined by measuring the rotation of a capstan that rotates in unison with d e tape movement. In a first embodiment, d e address system is a file mark plus a synchronous sprinkling address system (FMAS). This system writes the absolute address on die control track in the form of address packets. These packets are written in two types of locations. The first type (type 1) is written at the beginning of each program and at die end of the last program on the tape. The main function of these packets is to serve as "file marks" for search of starting points of programs. The second type of packet (type 2) is asynchronously recorded as often as possible in between the type 1 packets. These packets serve as "road marks" for determining current tape location. In a second embodiment, two separate address systems are used. A high resolution address system (HRAS) writes an absolute address at high repetition rate (e.g., once every few seconds) on a line of die VBI. The second type of address system is a low resolution address system (LRAS) where the absolute address is written on the control track at the beginning of each program as well as the end of d e last program as an address mark. An alternate LRAS is to write only marks, such as VISS or VASS marks in the control track at the beginning of each program on d e tape and at die end of die tape. The TID is generated by seeding a random number generator with the time of die first usage of the VCR so that the probability of two VCRs having the same identification number is reduced. The TID also includes a tape number. Multiple indexing VCRs may be interconnected on a bus for transferring directory data therebetween. In a specific implementation, a household may have several VCR systems that will play some video tapes in both systems. The interconnection allows the directory to be transferred between multiple VCRs so that each VCR has the same directory library. In yet another embodiment, an input/output port is provided so that the user may connect die VCR system to a printer or another external device such as a telephone line or a floppy disk drive. The directory or auxiliary information broadcast with a program may be printed in hard copy. Brief Description of the Drawings FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a indexing video cassette recorder, using a hybrid indexing system that provides indexing of recorded programs for home recorded tapes, prerecorded tapes, and retroaαively indexed tapes, and a standard video cassette format, and diat has a directory controller, a bus interface, and an output interface and embodies d e invention. FIG. 2 is a schematic conceptually illustrating a structure of data stored in die RAM of the directory controller of FIG. 1 according to a specific implementation of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a schematic illustrating a conceptual structure of an in-use directory in die data structure of FIG. 2 according to a specific implementation of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a graphical representation of the format of the information recorded on die magnetic tape in the cassette of FIG. 1 with markers and directories in d e control track. FIG. 5 is a graphical representation of the format of d e information recorded on the magnetic tape in the cassette of FIG. 1 with markers in the control track and d e directories in the fields of die video frames. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating die microprocessor controller of FIG. 1 and its interfaces for implementing a specific embodiment of die present invention. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating die microprocessor controller of FIG. 1 and its interfaces for implementing another specific implementation of the microprocessor controller 31. FIG. 8 is a timing diagram showing the format of the line 21 field 2 video signal in the vertical blanking interval of a typical video signal. FIGs. 9a-9b are parts of a schematic circuit diagram of a VBI encoder shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 9c illustrates a VBI decoder for decoding both broadcast signals and recorded signals. FIG. 10a is a timing diagram showing modification of die synchronization pulse recorded on die control track of a video tape for encoding a directory diereon. FIG. 10b is a timing diagram showing the synchronization pulses recorded on die control track when a binary bit "0" is to be written at one time instant (one frame) and a binary bit "1" is written at another time instant (another frame). FIG. 10c is a timing diagram showing d e timing of d e current of opposite polarity through the coil of the control head. FIG. lOd is a timing diagram showing die head signals generated by d e control pulse edge detector shown in FIG. lOf. FIG. lOe is a timing diagram showing die head signals generated by die control pulse edge detector shown in FIG. lOf in response to the current flow shown in FIG. 10c. FIG. 1 Of is a block diagram of a circuit 4400 for controlling die reading and writing of encoded data signals on die control track. Figs. lOg-lOh is a detailed schematic of the circuit of FIG. lOf. FIG. lOi is a block diagram for an alternate embodiment of die circuit for encoding and decoding data on die control track shown in FIG. lOf. FIG. 11 illustrates an embodiment of a remote control unit for operating the indexing VCR of FIG. 1. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of anodier embodiment of the remote controller for the indexing VCR of FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is a schematic view of an embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a file mark plus asynchronous sprinkling address system. FIG. 14 is a schematic view of an alternate embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a high and low resolution addressing system. FIG. 15 is a schematic view of another alternate embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a high and low resolution addressing system. FIG. 16 is a schematic view of yet anoώer embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and program numbers using a VISS PLUS TP data packet address system. FIG. 17 is a schematic view of the embodiment of FIG. 16 where a program has been overwritten on die tape. FIG. 18 is a functional block diagram showing a multiple VCR system for transferring directory data between die VCRs over a communication bus. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the operation of broadcasting a library to o&er VCRs for one embodiment of die system shown in FIG. 18. FIG. 20 is a schematic view showing the data packet format for die transmitted data for one embodiment of d e system shown in FIG. 18. FIG. 21 is the flow chart showing the steps employed in die receiving of library information from another VCR for one embodiment of die system shown in FIG. 18. FIG. 22 is a schematic view showing die data format for die directory recorded on pre-recorded tapes. FIG. 23 is a schematic view showing the data packet format for die absolute address packet. FIG. 24 is a schematic view showing die data packet format for the tape identification number (TID). FIG. 25 is a schematic view showing the format for another embodiment of die directory packet recorded in die VBI for prerecorded tapes. FIG. 26 is a schematic view showing the format for another embodiment of die directory packet D(0) for the tape tide recorded in the VBI for prerecorded tapes. FIG. 27 is a schematic view showing die format for another embodiment of a TP packet recorded on die VBI for HR tapes and PR tapes. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing die format for another embodiment of a TID for an HR tape. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing die format for another embodiment of a TID for a PR tape. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of an indexing VCR using a FMAS addressing system for writing a tape identification number, an address, and a directory to a home recorded tape (HR tape) during recording or ejection. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of an indexing VCR using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system of writing a tape identification and a program number to a home recorded tape (HR tape) during recording. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing die steps employed to write a tape identification, an absolute address and a directory to create a retroactively indexed tapes by an indexing VCR using a FMAS or LRAS addressing system. FIGS. 33a-33b are flow charts showing die steps employed in d e operation of die indexing VCR using a FMAS addressing system when a tape is inserted dierein. FIGS. 34a-34b are flow charts showing the steps employed in die operation of die indexing VCR, using the VISS PLUS TP addressing system, when a tape is inserted therein. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die search for a program on an indexed tape using a FMAS addressing system. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the search for a program on an indexed tape using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing die steps employed in the search for a program on an indexed tape using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system and an absolute addressing system. FIG. 38 is a schematic view of a system for determining die absolute program location of videotape without using address marks. FIG. 39 shows an alternate embodiment for determining tape lengdi. FIG. 40 is a schematic view of an alternate embodiment for die tape movement sensor. FIG. 41 is a schematic view of an another alternate embodiment determining d e location on the tape using a tape movement sensor. FIGs. 42a-42b are flow charts showing the steps employed in die operation of transferring a directory along widi the tape to a second VCR diat is not connected to die first VCR. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the processing of program related information. FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of die display of die program related information stored in the buffers. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of the indexing VCR 10 for video magazines. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of recording an electronic program guide. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the operation of the index functions for an electronic guide using the indexing VCR. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of die display of die directory selected in FIG. 47. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram of die display of die directory including die electronic guide selected in FIG. 47. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram illustrating die electronic program guide wid a video grid and video clips with an exploded view of a movie guide portion of the guide. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing die steps employed in the operation of the indexing VCR for an electronic program guide using a video grid and video clips. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the operation of temporarily indexing portions of a video tape between VISS marks. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of playing temporarily indexed portions of a video tape between VISS marks. FIG. 54 is a schematic view showing the format for the pointer packet data broadcasted in the VBI for auxiliary information. FIG. 55 is a schematic view showing the format for die CSPG/PRI packet data recorded in die VBI as pointed to by die pointer in line 21 of die VBI. FIG. 56 is a schematic view showing me video magazine (VM) packet used for video magazines. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in storing a directory in a library. FIGs. 58a-58f are flow charts showing die steps employed in one specific embodiment of die invention. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing die steps performed by die controller when an enhanced tape is inserted into die VCR embodying the present invention. FIGs. 59b-59n are flow charts showing the steps performed by die controller when different keys are pressed. FIGs. 60a-60p illustrates the different screens displayed by die VCR embodying the present invention. FIGs. 61a-61c illustrate die steps of different procedures performed by die VCR embodying die present invention. FIG. 62 illustrate how instant information is decoded from die VBI and used in die VCR embodying d e present invention. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing die steps for extending d e recording of a broadcasted. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the steps employed in die operation of die parental control feature of d e indexing VCR. FIGs. 65a-651' are schematic views of displays for an indexing system according to a specific implementation of the invention. FIG. 66a is a block diagram of a video cassette recorder with a directory controller and a movable magnetic write and sensing system for information recorded on die back wall of d e cassette and depicts an alternate embodiment of die present invention. FIGs. 66b-66d illustrate the mechanical design of die movable head assembly of die system shown in FIG. 66a. FIG. 67 is a schematic circuit diagram of a motor control circuit. FIG. 68 is a schematic circuit diagram of a circuit for writing onto a magnetic strip. FIG. 69 is a schematic circuit diagram of a circuit for reading data from a magnetic strip. FIGs. 70a-70c illustrate die construction of a magnetic strip. Figs 70e-70j illustrate different ways of putting a function code on a magnetic strip. FIG. 71 is a block diagram of a video cassette recorder widi a directory controller and a semiconductor memory as an alternate embodiment of d e present invention. FIGs. 72a-72b show the construction of the semiconductor memory of FIG. 71. FIG. 73 illustrates how data are recorded in the semiconductor memory of FIG. 71 according to the specific implementation. FIG. 74 is a schematic and pictorial view of a video cassette recorder having a front load for die magnetic tape cassette in which die recorder has a reader and writer for a direαory and/or direαory locations on a magnetic strip along the edge of die magnetic tape cassette. FIG. 75 is a schematic and pictorial view of a video cassette recorder having a top load for a magnetic tape cassette in which the recorder has a reader and writer for a directory and/or directory locations on a magnetic strip along the edge of d e magnetic tape cassette. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of a videocassette using a magnetic strip for the VCRs of FIGs. 74-75. FIG. 77 is a diagram of a stack of adhesive-backed magnetic strips. FIG. 78 shows schematically an alternate embodiment of a videocassette having a memory comprising a magnetic strip for storing directory information. FIG. 79 shows a magnetic strip attached to die top of a cassette and also a mark provided on d e magnetic strip. FIG. 80 shows two magnetic strips attached to die back wall of a cassette. FIG. 81 is a block diagram of a video cassette recorder widi a direαory controller and a magnetic write and sensing system for information recorded on die back wall of d e cassette and depicts an alternate embodiment of the present invention. FIGs. 82a and 82b are side and top views of a magnetic write/sensor head unit for reading a magnetic strip. FIG. 83a is a timing chart of the clock signals prerecorded on d e control track of a magnetic strip for synchronizing a reading operation. FIG. 83b shows the signals recorded on die data track of a magnetic strip for allowing read/write operations to be performed in opposite direαions. FIG. 83c shows the output from a data track in an ideal situation. FIG. 84a is a flow chart illustrating the logic sequence of a write operation to a magnetic strip. FIG. 84b is a flow chart illustrating die logic sequence of a calibration operation for compensating misalignment of magnetic heads. FIG. 84c is a flow chart illustrating the logic sequence of a read operation on a magnetic strip. FIG. 85a and 85b are flow charts illustrating the sequence of operation of the video cassette recorder of FIG. 81 during loading and ejeαing a video tape cassette in the video cassette recorder in which d e magnetic strip at the edge of die tape cassette contains the latest direαory. FIG. 86, composed of FIGs. 86a, 86b, 86c and 86d, is a graphical representation of the format of information recorded on d e magnetic tape at different stages of operation in the embodiment of the invention depiαed in FIG. 1 using 2 markers. FIGs. 87a and 87b are flow charts illustrating the sequence of operation for updating and using die directory during loading and ejecting of a video tape cassette in the video cassette recorder of FIG. 1. FIG. 88, composed of FIGs. 88a, 88b, 88c and 88d, is a graphical representation of the format of information recorded on the magnetic tape at different stages of operation in the embodiment of die inventions depiαed in FIG. 1 using one marker. FIG. 89 is a flow chart which in combination with the flow chart of FIG. 87b illustrates the sequence of operation of the video cassette recorder of FIG. 81 in which the magnetic strip at the edge of die tape cassette contains the location of the latest direαory. FIG. 90a is a flow diagram of a keyboard character entry tiding method. FIG. 90b is a flow diagram of a cursor position updating mediod used widi die mediod of FIG. 90a. FIG. 90c is a diagram of a keyboard-mode tide display. FIG. 91a is a flow diagram of a scrolling character entry tiding mediod. FIG. 91b is a diagram of a scroll-mode tide display. FIGs. 92a and 92b are flow charts illustrating die sequence of operation for a video cassette recorder having additional features according to die present invention. FIGs. 93a and 93b are flow charts that are counteφarts to FIGs. 92a and 92b for a system which has a moving head or a semiconductor memory. Dβtailβd Description The Induing YCR FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an indexing VCR system 10 including a video cassette reader/recorder (VCR) 1 widi a conventional video tape cassette 40, a video display 50, and a direαory controller 30. The VCR 1 is a conventional video reader/recorder device and uses any one of many different recording technologies such as BETA, VHS, super VHS, 8 mm, VHS-C or any other popular technologies. In particular, VHS-C indexed tapes can be played directly on a VHS indexing VCR wid full index fiinαioning. The cassette 40 is a conventional video cassette having a magnetic tape 42 packaged in a cartridge or cassette housing (hereafter called cassette). Even though die size and design of die housing is different for different types of recording technology, die basic information mat goes on die tape itself is similar. The technology and operation of a VCR are well understood in die art. The VCR 1 has a button control panel 3 widi control buttons, including LOAD 3a, PLAY 3b, STOP 3c, RECORD 3d, and EJECT 3e, for controlling the operation of the VCR 1. The LOAD button 3a is optional and is not used on machines which load automatically. The VCR control logic circuit 21 receives control signals from the button control panel 3 and controls the overall operation of the VCR 1 by sending control signals to a motor and mechanical control logic circuit 5, a video logic circuit 7, a position logic and counter circuit 9, and a control and audio track head logic circuit 11 of die VCR 1, as well as to the video display 50 and die microprocessor controller 31 of the directory controller 30. The motor and mechanical control logic circuit 5 controls loading and ejecting of the cassette 40 and also controls movement of the video tape 42 within die video cassette 40 during recording, reading (playback), fast forward, and rewind. The video logic circuit 7 controls the operation of a video read/write head drum 13 in reading from or recording video signals to the tape 42. The electrical signals are magnetically coupled between die video logic circuit 7 and die video head drum 13 using a winding 14. The position logic and counter circuit 9 monitors tape movement through a cassette tape movement sensor 22 and generates signals mat represent tape position. The control and audio track head logic circuit 11 controls writing, reading, and erasing of signals on die control or audio track of the tape 42 through die write head 19, die read head 17, and die erase head 15. The directory controller 30 includes a microprocessor controller 31, a random access memory (RAM) 33 and a direαory input/output display and control panel 32. Preferably the microprocessor controller 31 comprises an integrated circuit microprocessor, a program store, such as a read-only-memory (ROM), for storing a control program to implement methods of die invention, and a clock for generating a clock signal for timing funαions and providing die time. The time may be set using the direαory input/output display and control panel 32 in a manner known in the art. Alternatively, the VCR 1 may maintain the time. The RAM 33 is a conventional random access semiconductor memory which interfaces directly with die microprocessor controller 31. The RAM 33 is preferably non-volatile. Alternatively, the RAM 33 is battery backed up. A portion of die RAM 33 shown as system data 33b, is also used for storing the system software of the microprocessor controller 31. The RAM 33 is also used for storing die program direαory 33a. The size of die RAM 33 is at the discrαion of the manufacturer. However, the RAM 33 preferably can store the directory of at least 100 tapes. Accordingly, the RAM 33 is preferably at least 128k bits. Data compression may be used for storing die directory in the RAM 33. The directory input/output display and control panel 32 has an alphanumeric keyboard 32a and special function keys, such as a SEARCH key 32b for commanding searches for data in die directory 33a and on die tape 42, a MODIFY key 32c for modifying or deleting direαory information in the RAM 33, and an ENTER key 32d for entering program directory information. Instead of providing special funαion keys, functions can also be initiated by entering predefined sequences of conventional keys on die alphanumeric keyboard 32a. A display 32e is a conventional liquid crystal or other type display for displaying data being entered on d e keyboard 32a, and to display die directory or other information stored in die RAM 33. Alternately, as discussed below, an on-screen display 50a can be used. The directory information stored in the RAM 33 is processed by the microprocessor controller 31. The VCR 1 additionally comprises a character generator circuit 23 coupled to d e VCR control logic circuit 21 and to a charaαer generator read-only memory (ROM) 25. Charaαer generators are well-known in the art. Typically, the charaαer generator ROM 25 stores a data table representing pixel or bit patterns of a plurality of alphanumeric charaαers, such as die Roman alphabet and die Arabic numerals. Upon command by die VCR control logic circuit 21 and die charaαer generator circuit 23, die data in the charaαer generator ROM 25 is read and placed in an output signal to the video display at a position on die display determined by coordinates generated by die microprocessor controller 31. The end result is visual display of a alphanumeric charaαer on d e display screen. Charaαer generators are well-known for channel display in television receivers, and for use in professional tiding equipment. The screen 50a is preferably 36 characters x 15 rows. As will be described below, a broadcaster preferably broadcasts auxiliary information in this format. For displays widi a different format, the indexing VCR 10 reformats the information. For example, a VCR wim a higher screen display density, such as 36 charaαers x 15 rows, may center die information in the 24 charaαers x 10 rows format. Alternatively, for a higher screen display density, die data may be broadcasted at die higher density. When diere are more rows than can be displayed on one page, die indexing VCR 10 displays a message, such as "(MORE)," to inform the user that there is another page of information. Commercially available decoder circuits well known in die art for decoding die closed caption broadcasting system for die deaf can be optionally connected to the directory controller 30 for automatic generation of the program tide for die direαory of d e program being recorded. Television broadcasts include tides and subtides transmitted during die Vertical blanking interval (VBI) portion (described below) of die broadcast video signal, which can be decoded and displayed as text subtides along wid d e video image by means of special decoding circuitry. Regular TV receivers do not decode nor process die signal, but widi special decoder circuitry, the encoded text can be extraαed and fed to d e direαory controller 30 for automatic generation of die tide of the program being recorded. The extraαed, decoded program tide can be edited by a user or saved in die directory. Thus, die extracted program tide can serve as an alternate data input source for die program directory, reducing die needed amount of user input. Odier auxiliary information described below may also be broadcasted during d e VBI. As shown in FIG. 1 , caption decoding can be implemented by coupling an input of a VBI signal decoder 60a to the output of a tuner 61 which is generally included in die majority of consumer VCR's for off-the-air recording. The tuner 61 receives a broadcast TV signal from an antenna 63 or a cable TV signal source 64. Both the decoder, d e tuner, and the interaction of both, are conventional in the art. Examples of commercially available VBI caption decoders include die TeleCaption 4000 Adaptor, commercially available from National Caption Institute, Falls Church, Virginia, and Teletext Decoder, available from Norpak Corporation, Ottawa, Canada. In a specific embodiment of the present invention, die VBI decoder 60a is a circuit from ITT with part number of CCD3000. The CCD3000 decoder may be sα to decode a selected field and line of die VBI by setting a control and status register. Field seleαion is accomplished by seleαively setting bit 4 of the IM BUS control register with a RAM address of 02H. Line seleαion is accomplished by seleαively setting die IM Bus control register a with RAM address of 04H. (See "CCD 3000 Closed-Caption Decoder preliminary", table 4.2, page 31, Edition April 22, 1991, ITT Semiconductors.) A decoder signal line 65 is coupled from die decoder to the VCR control logic circuit 21 to carry decoded caption data to die control logic circuit. The VCR control logic circuit 21 is commanded by die microprocessor controller 31 to pass the decoded data to die direαory 33a under control of a stored program in the RAM 33. The program then causes the caption information to be stored as a program tide in die direαory and displayed on die display 50. The VBI data is sent to die RAM 33 during or immediately before the display of an on-screen direαory at step 1408 described below for FIG. 35a, so that when die directory is displayed, die caption data immediately appears in die directory display. A user dien can edit die caption to adjust it as desired. Caption data is placed in a broadcast TV signal by a broadcast TV station in a continuous stream; a user of the VCR 1 cannot stop or slow down the stream without additional hardware. Thus, it is possible that the first caption data received by die antenna 63 is not d e program tide. This problem can be overcome by coupling a data buffer memory 62 to die decoder. Under control of the decoder, all caption data received by die VBI decoder 60a is stored in die caption buffer and serially output to the VCR control logic circuit 21. Each caption data word is displayed in die directory, and die user presses the ENTER button to accept the word and store it as a program tide. For a period of time dependent on the size of the buffer and die rate of data received by die VBI decoder 60a, received data remains in the buffer from which it can be recalled by a user and saved as a program tide. When die buffer 62 fills, any additional data words received will cause overflow, resulting in loss of the earliest received word. If a large enough buffer 62 is used, this overflow effect will not be a problem. The functions of reviewing buffered data and storing saved tides can be controlled by a stored computer program or subroutine in the RAM 33. Not only can the information (e.g. tide, subtide, program identification) transmitted during the VBI portion be displayed in real time or used to generate program tide for the directory, it can be utilized to further facilitate operation of the VCR. For example, by monitoring die transmitted tide, die VCR can automatically deteα the end of a program and stop recording Λereto. Also by monitoring the VBI portion used for transmitting the tide, die VCR can filter out (in recording a program) segments that are unrelated to die program (e.g. commercials), by temporarily stopping the VCR if changes in the tide portion are dαeαed. It is disclosed in die preceding paragraphs that die VBI data may be broadcast at a relatively high repetition rate prior to broadcast, enabling a suitable decoder to detect die data. In the system of FIG. 1, me decoder 60a can be designed to receive and store in buffer 62 die program identification information from line 21 of field 2 of each frame. Using suitable logic, the program tide and odier information can be stored automatically in the direαory 33a, without user intervention. Caption data decoding is further described in die following specifications, which are hereby incorporated by reference herein: Tide 47, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 15 as amended by GEN. Dockα No. 91-1; FCC 91-119; "CLOSED CAPTION DECODER REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TELEVISION RECEIVERS"; Tide 47, C.F.R., Part 73.682(a)(22), Caption Transmission format; Tide 47, C.F.R. Part 73.699, figure 6; "TELEVISION SYNCHRONIZING WAVEFORM"; Tide 47, C.F.R., Part 73.699, figure 17A; "LINE 21, FIELD 1 DATA SIGNAL FORMAT"; and PBS Engineering Report No. E-7709-C, "TELEVISION CAPTIONING FOR THE DEAF: SIGNAL AND DISPLAY SPECIFICATIONS". Mempry Stmg r-s Now die memory structure of the RAM 33 is described by referring to FIG. 2 which is a schematic conceptually illustrating a typical structure of die data stored in die RAM 33 according to one embodiment of die present invention. The RAM 33 can be viewed conceptually as having an area 1010 for storing operation flags. These flags include a mode flag (MODEFLAG) 1011 for indicating die operation speed (e.g. SP, LP, or SLP) of the VCR 1 and which will be changed whenever die operation speed of die VCR 1 is changed. A tape length flag (TAPELNG) 1012 indicates die length (e.g. E-60, E-90, E-120) of an inserted tape 42. A second memory flag 1014 (SECMEM) stores access information of a secondary memory which may be provided on die cassette 40 for storing directory information. For example, if the secondary memory is a magnetic strip, described below for FIGs. 66-70 and 74-93, SECMEM 1014 may store the recording density of a magnetic strip, or if the secondary memory is a semiconductor memory described below for FIGs. 71-73, SECMEM 1014 may store the access time and capacity thereof. The flags also include a feature control field (FTCNTL) 1013 for specifying the VCR funαions diat are available to a user. In the simplest case, if a secondary memory is needed on die cassette for storing directory information, FTCNTL 1013 will be sα in one way if an inserted cassette has the secondary memory and in anodier way if die inserted cassette has no secondary memory. FTCNTL 1013 may also specify other funαions, and can be sα by reading a code carried at a predetermined area of d e cassette (e.g. on a magnetic strip on the cassette housing). Area 1010 also stores a message pointer 1017 pointing to a message area 1022 which stores input and output messages; and a CDTL pointer 1019 pointing to a CDTL buffer 1024 which stores channel-date-time-length (CDTL) data of future recordings. In a preferred embodiment, a library 1023 is also provided in die RAM 33. The library 1023 stores direαories of tapes which users of die VCR 1 have archived. Each directory stored in die library contains substantially the same information as the in-use directory. If a library is present, a library pointer 1015 is provided for pointing to the library 1023. A directory pointer 1018 is also provided for pointing to an in-use direαory 1021 which stores the direαory of die currendy inserted tape. This direαory pointer 1018 may actually point to a location in the library wherein die directory of d e tape is located. In addition, die area 1010 also stores a volume number field (VOLNO) 1016 which stores a counter value representing die number of tape directories already stored in die library 1023. Odier flags may be added as needed. Referring to FIG. 3, which is a schematic illustrating a conceptual structure of die in-use directory 1021 in the data structure of FIG. 2, d e in-use directory 1021 stores the direαory of die cassette tape currendy inserted into die VCR 1. For each program recorded on die cassette tape, a corresponding entry 1041 is sα up in die in-use directory 1021. For purposes of illustration, FIG. 3 shows die entry 1041 only for program 1. However, each program similarly has an entry 1041. Each entry 1041 stores a tide or program name (PROGRAM) 1042; a program address (LOC) 1043 which stores the absolute tape counter value of the beginning of the program; a program length value (LENGTH) 1044 which stores the length of the recorded program, represented as a funαion of die difference between its address from die address of die next program or record or a measure of time from a fixed reference point, such as die beginning of the tape; an optional program type field (TYPE) 1045 which stores the category of the recorded program; an optional program audience field (AUDIENCE) 1046 which stores the recommended audience of die program; and an optional recording speed (SPEED) 1047 which stores the speed at which die program is recorded. A current tape location (CURRENT LOC) 1049 is also stored in die directory for indicating die absolute position from die beginning of die tape 42 in die cassette 40 where the valid directory is located, or die value of the tape counter when the tape is ejeαed. This field is used for setting die tape counter when die tape is reloaded into the VCR 1. The recording on d e tape of the absolute tape position is described below. A field 1051 is a pointer pointing to die address of die first entry of the directory 1021 represented in FIG. 3 by an arrow pointing to the program name (PROGRAM) 1042. Each entry also has a field 1048 storing the address of die next entry in the directory also represented in FIG. 3 by an arrow pointing to program 12. These fields provide a link from one entry to the next entry and are used for facilitating search, deletion, and addition of entries. In the preferred embodiment, the directory information is not stored on the tape 42, but is retrieved from the library 1023. In this embodiment, a volume label (VOLNO) 1050 is provided in die in-use direαory 1021. This field is used for retrieving die direαory information of the tape from a library 1023 stored in die RAM 33. Each item in die directory can be modified dirough the use of die buttons on the keyboard 32a and die special funαion keys 32b, 32c, 32d of die directory controller 32, as will be described below. Tape Format By way of background, die format of die tape 42 is now described. FIGs. 4 and 5 illustrate die information content of one example of video tape for bodi BETA and VHS format which both use the same general tape layout. The tape 42 is divided into three areas. A narrow strip running along die upper edge of the tape 42 is an audio track 42a which contains audio signals. A second narrow strip running along the bottom edge of die tape is a control track 42c which contains synchronization ("sync") control signals. The middle area 42b is for video signals which are recorded in pairs of parallel fields going up and down die width of the tape at a slight angle. The markers 110, 112, and 114 will be described below. The video head drum 13 is fitted widi two read/record heads 180 degrees apart, so diat even numbered lines make up one field and odd numbered lines make up die other field. To reduce flicker on die video screen, these fields are projeαed onto the face of the cadiode ray tube (CRT) screen 50a of the video display 50 at alternating intervals. Decoding VBI Information Video images in cadiode ray tube (CRT) type video devices (e.g. television) are generated by scanning a beam along a predefined pattern of lines across a screen. Each time all d e lines are scanned, a frame is said to have been produced. Each video frame in die broadcast signal is divided into two fields, referred to as field 1 and field 2. The VCR control logic circuit 21 scans die beam typically from the top, left hand corner and scans across the screen. After it finishes scanning one line, the beam returns to die left-hand side and repeats along another line which is parallel to but lower dian the previous line. The scanning continues along the odd-numbered lines until the beam reaches d e center of die bottom part of the screen. These odd-numbered lines form field 1. From die bottom center of the screen, the beam returns to the top, where it starts scanning from substantially the center of d e screen along die even-numbered lines which interlace the lines of field 1. The even-numbered lines form field 2. When die beam reaches the bottom, right-hand corner of the screen, a picture frame is formed. In die NTSC protocol widely used in North America, each field contains 262.5 horizontal lines and a pair of fields constitute a single 525 line video frame and creates one video picture at one instant in time on die video display 50. During die time in which die beam returns from die bottom to the top of die screen, it carries no television signals because it does not produce any picture element on the screen. This time interval is generally known as die vertical blanking interval (VBI). Its duration is generally several times die time duration when die beam takes to scan across the screen. In other words, the length of the VBI is equal to die time for the beam to scan several lines. Thus, die VBI typically contains a plurality of lines and is identified by die field widi which it is associated. Apparatus and mediods using these techniques are well known in the art and dierefore are not discussed in detail herein. Since no image element is produced on a television screen during a vertical blanking interval, no information therefore needs to be carried by die broadcast signals. Thus, proposals have made to use die VBI for conveying auxiliary information from a television network or station to the audience. For example, Closed-Caption data associated widi a television program are transmitted as encoded composite data signal during VBI line 21, field 1 of die standard NTSC video signal, at a rate of 480 bits per second. In the above-identified Draft EIA-608, information are sent in die VBI as packets. Currendy, six classes of packets are proposed, including: a "Current" class for describing a program currently being transmitted; a "Future" class for describing a program to be transmitted later; a "Channel Information" class for describing non-program specific information about the transmitting channel; a "Miscellaneous" class for describing odier information; a "Public Service" class for transmitting data or messages of a public service nature such as National Weather Service Warnings and messages; and a "Reserved" class reserved for future definition. According to die E.I.A. proposal, a packet is preceded by a Start/Type character pair, followed by information/informational charaαers pairs until all me informational charaαers in the packα have been sent. Table I lists a subset of the control and type codes of various kinds of information to be broadcasted in the VBI according to d e E.I.A. proposal. For example, to transmit the program identification number (scheduled start time) of a program, a control code of Olh, a type code of Olh and a packα of four charaαers (one charaαer specifying die minute, one charaαer specifying the hour, one charaαer specifying the date and one charaαer specifying the mond ) are sent. Similarly, to transmit the program name, a control code of Olh, a type code of 03h and a packet of between 2 to 32 charaαers are sent. As another example, the VBI may also be used to transmit a time-of-day value, by sending a control code of 07h, a type code of Olh and a packet of two charaαers. TABLE I CONTROL CODE TYPE CODE Olh Olh PR O G R A M ID E NTI F I C A TIO N N U MB E R (PROGRAM START TIME) (CURRENT CLASS) 02h LENGTH/TIME-IN-SHOW 03h PROGRAM NAME 04h PROGRAM TYPE 05h PROGRAM AUDIENCE 06h AUDIO SERVICES 07h CAPTION SERVICES 09h ASPECT RATIO INFORMATION OCh COMPOSITE PACKET-1 ODh COMPOSITE PACKET-2 10h-17h PROGRAM DESCRIPTION YOU 1 TO YOU 05h Olh NETWORK NAME (CHANNEL 02h CALL LETTERS (STATION ID) INFORMATION AND NATIVE CHANNEL CLASS) 07h Olh TIME OF DAY (MISCELLANEOUS) 02h IMPULSE ID 03h SUPPLEMENTAL DATA LOCATION Referring back to FIG. 1, the microprocessor controller 31 controls the sequence and operation of the directory controller 30 and interfaces with the VCR control logic circuit 21 to implement the necessary functional capabilities for reading, updating and recording die directory. The microprocessor controller 31, according to a specific embodiment, is a microcomputer chip with part number of UPD78234 from NEC Corporation, a logical block diagram of which is illustrated in FIG. 6. This microcomputer chip preferably is a microprogrammed processor capable of accessing a data memory of up to one megabyte. A plurality of input output ports, P0-P7, are provided for coupling to various components of the VCR 1, such as die motor and mechanical control logic circuit 5, die video logic circuit 7, die position logic and counter circuit 9, and die control and audio track head logic circuit 11. Asynchronous communication between the microcomputer chip and diese components is achieved by die provision of a plurality of interrupt inputs INPT0-INPT5. FIG. 7 shows a block diagram of another specific implementation of the microprocessor controller 31. A chip 701 performs the vertical and horizontal synchronization separation of die VBI lines. The chip 701 also slices and encodes die VBI lines. This chip performs the funαions of die VBI encoder 60b, and die buffer 62 (see FIG. 1). A chip 702 controls the RAM 33 and performs error correαion and decryption for some type of data coming from the chip 701. The chip 702 also provides an interface widi the serial link (I-LINK) and an interface widi die VCR control logic circuit 21. The chip 702 also controls the RAM 33. The microcontroller processor 31 in the indexing VCR 10 performs all indexing functions and human interface, inteφrets (e.g. tab, indent, screen format, attributes) and processes die auxiliary information display. The microcontroller also performs all normal indexing VCR 10 funαions. In this embodiment, the interface between the chip 702 and die VCR control logic circuit 21 is a clock serial bus via two or three I/O lines which is hardware selectable by the two/three pin mode input signal to the chip 702. The interrupt signal line allows the VCR control logic circuit 21 to monitor the status of the chip 702 by interrupt. In a two pin configuration, the data I/O signal line funαions as a two way signal pad between die VCR control logic circuit 21 and die chip 702. In the diree pin configuration, the chip 702 provides data on a data output signal line. Also, in die three pin configuration, die VCR control logic circuit 21 sends data on die data "I" line to die chip 702. The external leng i enable signal enables the chip 702 to communicate with d e external RAM 73. The MSB/LSB seleα signal sets die serial bus to MSB first. Indexing Overview The VCR uses die directory described above in FIGs. 2-3 to perform searches of the user's tape library to find die tape that a selected program is on. The directory of a particular tape may be searched using keywords, or tide information to locate a program on die tape. The tape may men be advanced to die seleαed program. Indexing is used herein to describe diese searches, die generation of these direαories, and all related funαions. The indexing VCR 10 provides a hybrid mediod for indexing recorded programs, which are recorded on one of three types of tape: home recorded tapes, prerecorded tapes, and retroaαively indexed tapes. A home recorded tape (HR tape) is a tape on which the user has made recordings from broadcast or cable by eidier real time recording, timer programming his VCR, or using a VCR PLUS+™ programming system. As will be described below, die index is created at the time of recording by die VCR. The second type of tape is a prerecorded tape (PR tape) diat is a commercially purchased tape, such as a Raquel Welch work-out tape, a karaoke tape, songs, lectures or speeches, that contains many tides on it or may contain only one program. These tapes are not expeαed to be overwritten. The index is stored on die tape by the video publisher at die time of die recording. The diird type of tape is a retroactively indexed tape (RI tape) which is a previously unindexed recorded tape on which d e user retroactively adds an index. For this type of tape, the index is added by die VCR at d e time of the retroactively indexing. For die HR tapes and die RI tapes which are both produced by die home VCR, the directories all reside in die RAM 33 of the indexing VCR 10. As will be described in detail below, each tape has tape identification numbers (TID) written at some repetition rate along the whole tape on eiϋ er a VBI line for HR tapes or on a control track 42c for RI tapes. If the direαory or direαories are stored in d e video fields, corruption of video signals widi directory signals on seleαed video fields, such as a few odd fields spaced apart by a certain number of fields, has little noticeable visual degradation of the video picture. This is because die human brain retains a visual image for a brief period after die image is removed ("persistence of vision"). The TID's reference the tape to a corresponding direαory stored in the RAM 33. When either a HR tape or a RI tape is inserted into the VCR, the VCR locates and reads die tape identification and then retrieves the corresponding direαory from die RAM 33. This operation is preferably independent of die point of tape insertion to thereby effeαively create a random access capability for seleαions on the tape. On the other hand, for PR tapes which are produced by die video publisher, die directory is stored on d e tape preferably by writing it repeatedly on a VBI line. When die PR tape is inserted into an indexing VCR, die indexing VCR 10 independentiy of die point of tape insertion can quickly locate and read a copy of the direαory from die VBI line. Thus, die PR tape can be read by random access also. In one embodiment, RI tapes are created by only writing VISS marks on the control track and manually entering the program tide information into die memory. Because this embodiment does not add TID information to die tape itself, the user must identify die tape to the indexing VCR. Once the tape is identified, d e VCR operates as if the RI tape is an HR tape. Consequently, die tape becomes random access at this time and not when die tape is first inserted. The VCR 1 includes a VBI encoder 60b coupled to the video logic circuit 7 whereby information, which receives digital data, such as tape label (e.g. a volume number), directory, and/or addresses, from die microprocessor controller 31 and encodes such data for recording into the VBI portion of the video signals which are to be recorded on die cassette tape 40. When line 21 field 2 is encountered, die digital data stored in die registers are output so that they can be written on die video track as described above. VBI encoder 60b can be implemented in a similar manner as one of those already existing in d e art, e.g. encoders for encoding closed-caption data into the VBI portions of video signals. An exemplary implementation of the VBI encoder 60b is also illustrated in die schematic block diagram of FIGs. 9a and 9b. Such implementation is explained herein with reference to die timing diagram shown in FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a timing diagram showing the format of die line 21 field 2 video signals. The figure shows the signals being preceded by a line synchronization pulse, followed by color burst signals. The color burst signals are followed by a blanking level, 7 cycles of clock run-in signals and dien the data signals. Exemplary VBI Encoder Refer now to FIGs. 9a and 9b, die VBI encoder 60b receives the video signal VIDEO IN from the tuner 61 for recording onto a cassette tape. A buffer 9011 is provided to receive the video signal VIDEO IN so tiiat the tuner 61 is not loaded down by die VBI encoder 60b. The output from the buffer 9011 is provided to a clamping circuit 9012 so mat die D.C. level can be restored to facilitate inserting of information signals into the video signals. The D.C. level is fixed by a circuit 9013, by setting the variable resistor therein. The output from the buffer 9011 is also provided to a decoder 9014 which is an integrated circuit, such as part no. LM1881N from National Semiconductor. The integrated circuit decodes die video signal to produce a composite sync CSYNGignal, a vertical sync VSYNSignal, and a field signal FIELD 1. The composite sync CSYNQgnal is provided to a circuit 9015 whereby a monostable one-shot signal with a fixed pulse widdi is produced. Two output signals are generated from the circuit 9015 and they are used as die input signals, -CLAMBnd CLAMP, into the clamping circuit 9012. Input data (i.e. directory information or address) signal S IN for encoding into die VBI and a clock by a signal S NCLK are provided to a register 9023 (see FIG. 9b) tiirough a buffer 9022. These signals may be sent by the microprocessor controller 31 from one of its output ports. A circuit 9024 is anodier register circuit. Its inputs are alternately conneαed to high and low voltage levels. This circuit is used for producing die clock run-in signals, as shown in FIG. 8, before data are stored into d e VBI. Data from the register circuits 9023 and 9024 are provided as signals S OUT into a circuit 9017 (see FIG. 9a). The data signals from the circuit 9017 are combined with the D.C. signal outputted from the circuit 9013 (so that they have the same D.C. level as the video signals). When die data signals are to be written onto the tape, the data from the register 9023 (see FIG. 9b) will be written first. A signal, SRCSEL, which is generated from d e microprocessor controller 31, is used to seleα whether the signals for recording into die video track through a chip 9026 (see FIG. 9a) should come from the data signals (which may contain directory or address information) or the broadcast video signal VIDEO IN. Referring back to FIG. 9b, operation of die encoder is controlled by a sequencer formed by chips 9018, 9019, 9020 and 9021 operating in conjunction widi die chip 9025, a 74f74 D flip-flop and a clock signal from the clock circuit 9027. As illustrated in FIG. 9c, die VBI decoder 60a can be used at different time durations to decode eitiier the broadcast signals (Video In) from the tuner 61 or die recorded signals (PB Signal) read by die video logic circuit 7 from die tape 42. When die VCR 1 is recording a program, die VBI decoder 60a operates to decode information in die VBI of the broadcast signals. When die VCR 1 is playing back a program from the cassette tape 40, the VBI decoder 60a can operate to decode information stored in die VBI of the recorded signals (e.g. previously recorded direαory information). It needs to be noted that although die decoder 60a in the embodiment is used both for decoding broadcast signals and recorded signals, it will be understood that a separate decoder can be provided for each operation. Moreover, although die decoder 60a and die encoder 60b are shown and described as two units, they can be incorporated into a single semiconductor chip or implemented by discrete logic components. In the implementation of FIG. 7, the chip 701 performs die VBI signal processing. Prerecorded Tape As described above, prerecorded tapes (PR tape) are manufactured by a tape publisher and contain a plurality of different tided programs thereon. A program direαory or direαories containing information about die names and locations of each program or record on die tape is stored on die tape. In one of die specific embodiments, the label (e.g. a volume number or a name) for the tape is also recorded. Eid er the video frames 42b or the control track 42c (see FIGs. 4-5) may be used for storing the program direαory (s). In one embodiment, die program direαory is stored, by the VCR control logic circuit 21 under control of the microprocessor controller 31, in die control track 42c and in another embodiment in odd and/or even numbered fields of spaced apart pairs of video fields, eidier as full video frame or in the VBI. Using The Control Track It is well understood that modern video recorders typically have a capstan for pulling the cassette tape past a rotating video head drum. The control track 42c on the tape is normally provided for recording a synchronization pulse for synchronizing die rotation of the capstan widi die rotation of the video head drum. The synchronization pulse is conventionally a 30 Hz pulse, with only the leading edge being used for the synchronization. According to die present invention, directory information can be stored on die control track by modifying the control track pulse duty cycle so that the location of die flux reversal on a prerecorded video tape is modified so diat these relative locations represent digital data. FIG. 10a is a timing diagram showing die synchronization pulse recorded on die control track. FIG. lOd is a timing diagram showing die head signals generated by die control pulse edge dαector shown in FIG. lOf. FIG. lOe is a timing diagram showing the head signals generated by d e control pulse edge dαector shown in FIG. lOf in response to the current flow shown in FIG. 10c. The negative going head signal shown in FIG. lOd corresponds to die leading edge of die control pulse shown in FIG. 10a which will not be modified during die encoding of data. In a standard video recorder, when no data is recorded, die falling edge of each pulse occurs at substantially die mid-point 4401 of a pulse interval. According to one implementation of the present invention, to encode one of d e binary values (e.g. "0"), the falling edge is shifted forward (the corresponding positive going head signal shown in FIG. lOd is also shifted), e.g. to a time 44 or at about 37% of the pulse width 4402 from the rising edge. To encode anodier one of the binary values (e.g. " 1"), die falling edge is shifted backward, e.g. to a time 4403 at about 63% of the pulse width from the rising edge. Alternatively, die time of die pulse widdi may be other values, e.g., a "0" may be 30% and a "1" may be 70% . The position of the positive going head signal is shown in its modified location by die circuit 4400 to be described in connection with FIGs. lOf and lOg depending on die data that the signal represents. Because the leading edge of die pulse in FIG. 10a or die corresponding negative going pulse in FIG. lOd is not rewritten, the timing between negative going pulses is uniformly spaced at die control track 30 Hz frequency. However, in areas where two separate recordings adjoin, this uniform timing may not be mα and d e written data may be in error. Thus, it may be necessary to use preambles and post-ambles to identify encoded data and eidier error dαeαion codes such as cyclic redundancy codes or checksums to ensure data integrity. FIG. 10b is a timing diagram showing the synchronization pulses recorded on die control track when a binary bit "0" is to be written at one time instant (one frame) and a binary bit " 1" is written at anodier time instant (another frame). Normally, die synchronization pulses on a control track are recorded by saturated magnetization. To alter the timing of a falling edge, appropriate current must be applied to shift the magnetization at die altered portion of the track. To advance d e falling edge, as when a "0" is to be written, a first current (e.g. negative) must be applied so as to cause die magnαization between time 4402 and time 4403 to be in one direction. To delay d e falling edge, as when a "1" is to be written, a second current opposite in polarity to the first current (e.g. positive), must be applied so as to cause die magnαization between time 4402 and time 4403 to be in anodier direαion. FIG. lOf is a block diagram of a circuit 4400 for controlling the reading and writing of encoded data signals on the control track. Fig. lOg is a detailed schematic of die circuit 4400. The circuit 4400 comprises a current steering network 4405 which comprises a plurality of analog current switches controlled by a microprocessor 4413 (for clarity, control signals are not shown in FIG. lOf). The microprocessor 4413 is preferably a NEC 78238 microprocessor. By activating the appropriate switches, current may be driven dirough a control head in a desired direαion and at a predαermined timing relation to the leading edge of d e control pulse. The current steering network 4405 has a current source 4406 which provides a constant current through a control switch 4411 into two current padis, a first path formed by current switches 4408 and 4410, and a second path formed by current switches 4407 and 4409. The control inputs of current switches 4408 and 4409 are coupled to a common control signal (ASC3). The control inputs of current switches 4407 and 4410 are coupled to anodier common control signal (ASC4). To write a "0" to die control track, current switches 4408 and 4409 are closed and current switches 4407 and 4410 are opened during d e time duration between 4402 and 4403. As a result, a current passes from the current source 4406 through the current switch 4408 into the lower terminal of the control head, exits from the upper terminal of the control head and passes dirough the current switch 4409 to ground. To write a "1" to the control track, current switches 4407 and 4410 are closed and current switches 4408 and 4409 are opened during die time duration between 4402 and 4403. As a result, a current passes from the current source 4406 through die current switch 4407 to the upper terminal of the control head, exits from the lower terminal of the control head and passes dirough the current switch 4410 to ground. By seleαively controlling the closing and opening of d e two pairs of current switches, current of opposite polarity can be caused to flow dirough the coil of die control head, as illustrated in FIG. Writing on Control Track In order to avoid disastrous result of leaving the current switches on while the tape is free running, a software write proteα check is implemented. Writing is permitted only when a shorting bar is inserted between pins 32 and 33 of die microprocessor 4413. The control pulse is fed to a pin 24 of d e microprocessor 4413, and an interrupt INTP3 is conditioned to respond to die positive going edge of die signal. This triggers a capture register TMO internal to the microprocessor 4413. The first pass through of die routine is to note down die reading of d e capture register. The second interrupt cycle, and all d e subsequent ones, read d e capture register and establish the lengtii of die previous cycle by subtraαing the last register content from the current register content. This value is used as die current cycle length, assuming that d e speed can not vary so rapidly. By shifting this value 2 places to die right, die value is divided by 4. Since a 25 percent value is to be die direshold value in a timer TMl internal to the microprocessor 4413, and die timer TMl is fed by a 1/64 clock (CLK) instead of a 1/8 CLK as d e capture register TMO, a further shift of 3 more places is done. This shifted value is u en stored in a register _T25 in the microprocessor 4413. A further right shift of 1 place provides die 12.5 percent value (1/8 clock), which is then stored in a register T12 in die microprocessor 4413. The values in e registers _T12 and _T25 are added toged er to generate a 37.5 percent value, which is stored in a register T37 in the microprocessor 4413. In between the interrupt responses and die above calculation are the turning off of the gain clamp switches and the turning off of the VCR amplifier switches. The microprocessor 4413 then looks the polarity of the data that is to be written. If it is a zero, die microprocessor 4413 then subtracts the value in die register Tl from the value in the register T37, and loads die result into the compare register of timer TMl . The value in the register Tl is a constant representing the dead time used in performing the above calculations and die overhead of d e interrupt. The microprocessor 4413 then waits for the timer TMl to expire, and commands, using a signal ASC3, die current switches 4408 and 4409 to open and using current from die current source 4406, creates a flux reversal on d e tape at this point. At the same time, the microprocessor 4413 reloads die timer TMl with d e value in d e register _T37 after subtracting another empirical time constant T2 from it. When the timer TMl expires, it men turns off the current, allowing the head inductance current to recover through a 10K resistor to ground. After a time of about 600 microseconds, die microprocessor 4413 turns off die steering switch 4405, turns on the VCR preamp switch, releases the gain clamp, clears die interrupt status of INTP3 caused by die switching currents, restores the registers, and exits the interrupt routine. If the data to be written is a one, the process is similar except that instead of using die register _T37 to start die current, a register _T25 is used. Instead of providing the signal ASC3, a signal ASC2 is provided. The microprocessor 4413 uses the same register _T37 for the duration of die current. But because it starts die current earlier, it also finishes earlier. Therefore, a value T12 is added to die end of die cycle after die current steering switches are off before turning die VCR preamp back on. In one specific embodiment where directory information is stored on die control track, the tape contains only one single valid directory and a plurality of obsolete directories corresponding to die number of times the tape has been played and ejeαed from the VCR 1. The valid direαory is distinguished from the obsolαe direαories by a marker system to be desαibed later. In another embodiment, each time d e direαory is read into d e local RAM memory, the direαory is erased from die tape. During die process of tape ejeαion from the VCR 1, the updated directory is rewritten onto the tape at the place of ejeαion such that only one directory is maintained on the tape. The disadvantage of this embodiment is the added hardware and time required to selectively erase the direαory widiout disrupting die control or video signals. Remote Controller The VCR 1 also comprises a remote commander unit 1300 which communicates dirough wireless means with a remote signal receiver 29 in the VCR. As is known in the art, the remote commander comprises a plurality of push buttons, switches, and a jog shutde knob which create output signals. The signals are transmitted by wireless means known in the art, such as infrared transmission or radio-frequency signals, to the remote signal receiver 29. The receiver 29 decodes d e received signal and passes die decoded data to die VCR control logic circuit 21. An exemplary remote control unit is the Remote Commander provided widi d e above-identified Sony VCR. FIG. 11 illustrates an embodiment of a remote control unit 1300. The unit 1300 comprises a hand-held housing 1322 provided wid a plurality of push buttons 1301-1319. A remote jog shutde knob 1320 is provided for hand-held operation of the jog shutde feature of die VCR. A command mode seleαor switch 1301 enables aαivating the control unit. A plurality of channel number buttons 1302 enable remote entry of channel numbers. An ENTER button 1303 is used to enter channel numbers and menu options in die methods discussed below. A menu button 1304 is used to display a menu of user options, as discussed below. A plurality of cursor movement buttons 1305, each marked widi an arrow, is used to move an on-screen cursor in various menu operations. An antenna TV/VTR button 1306 is used to command the video display 50 to display a signal coming eidier from an antenna or the output of the VCR 1. A power switch 1307 enables turning power to the VCR 1 on and off. A TV/VTR switch 1308 enables seleαively using the remote control unit to control the VCR 1 or die video display 50. An input seleα button 1309 enables seleαion of the source to be recorded. Channel change buttons 1310 enable toggling the channel selection up and down. Similarly, volume buttons 1311 enable toggling die volume louder or softer. A record mode button 1312 enables seleαion of recording tape speed. A timer clear button 1313 is used to clear timer settings of the VCR. A timer record button 1314 is used to enter a timer recording mode. An index button 1315 is used to enter an index mode. Other buttons 1316-1319 can be used to control various funαions on the VCR, including die direαion, speed, and mode of the tape transport. The funαions and implementation of each button are well known in the art, and have been commercially embodied in the above-mentioned Sony VCR. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of anodier embodiment of die remote controller 1300 for the VCR of FIG. 1. A remote controller 9700 has a plurality of push buttons or keys 9701-9725. A power switch 9701 enables turning power to the VCR 1 on and off. A print button 9702 allows the user to print on hard copy or to disk d e directory or other information in the RAM 33. An ejeα button 9703 is used to ejeα die cassette 40 from the VCR. A page up button 9704 and a page down button 9705 are used to move up or down pages on die screen. A cancel button 9706 is used to cancel seleαions made. Channel change buttons 9707 enable toggling die channel seleαion up and down. A number keypad 9708 is used to enter numbers for commands and seleαions. An ENTER button 9709 is used to enter channel numbers and menu options in die methods discussed below. A library button 9710 is used to retrieve directories. A VCRPlus+'" button 9711 is used to enter "PLUSCODE™" numbers. An index button 9712 is used to enter an index mode. An edit button 9713 is used to edit seleαions on die screen. A review button 9714 is used to review stored seleαions. An erase button 9715 is used to erase seleαions. A rewind button 9716, a play button 9717, and a fast forward button 9719 are used to control tape movement and are well known in the art. A record mode button 9718 enables seleαion of recording tape speed and to record programs. A "V" button 9720 allows the user to store or retrieve auxiliary information associated widi a program being viewed and diat is transmitted concurrently with the program. An info "i" button 9721 is used to store "PLUSCODE™" numbers or channel -date-time-length data associated with a separate broadcast diat provides additional information related to die program or commercial being viewed. A "R" button 9722 is used to review stored seleαions using die "i" button 9721. Alternatively, the "v", "i", and "r" buttons may be used to dial a telephone number transmitted as part of d e auxiliary information as described above. A stop button 9723 is used to stop movement of me tape. A program identification (PGM ID) button 9724 is used to display die program tide and otiier information of die program being viewed eidier direct from cable or airwaves or from tape. A plurality of cursor movement or direαional arrow buttons 9725, each shaped like an arrow, are used to move an on-screen cursor in various menu operations. Alternatively, the VCR 1 or the display controller 30 may include diese buttons. Alternatively, the remote controller 75 may be included in a television remote controller or a universal remote controller which control a television or a plurality of electronic devices respeαively. Pirøtpr For HR and RI tapes, the directories are stored in die RAM 33 and referenced eidier by d e TIDs which are written repeatedly on line 19 of die VBI for HR tapes or by a tape number inputted by d e user, which the indexing VCR 10 uses to cross reference to a TID for RI tapes. For PR tapes, the direαory is written repeatedly, preferably as often as space allows, on line 20 of both fields of die VBI. Alternatively, die directory is written repeatedly on a line pointed to by a pointer in line 21, field 2. As a default, if the indexing VCR 10 cannot find a pointer in line 21, it looks for the directory in line 20. The recording format is per the E.I.A. specifications on Extended Data Services. The directory is stored as D(N) data packets, defined below in conjunction with FIG. 25, which contains all d e information that relates to a program entry in the direαory. Alternatively, die D(N) packα may be written in two or more lines to speed up die read process. Also, die D(N) packα may be written at a faster rate, such as two to four times faster, than the E.I.A. specification. The D(N) data packα contains a program entry where N ranges from 1 to the maximum program numbers in the direαory. For PR tapes, the TID and die program number are repeatedly written on both fields For RI tapes, the RAM 33 is capable of storing the program number and up to 32 charaαers per tide. When a PR tape is inserted into an indexing VCR 10, die indexing VCR 10 reads die VBI line 19 to quickly dαermine die TID and program number and men stops. When the user presses the Index button, die indexing VCR 10 dαermines from the TID d at the tape is not a HR tape. The indexing VCR 10 then goes into PLAY mode and reads d e direαory from VBI line 20 and displays it on-screen. Addressing System FIG. 13 is a schematic view of an embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a file mark plus asynchronous sprinkling address system. In the preferred embodiment, d e address system is a file mark plus asynchronous sprinkling (FMAS) address system. This system writes an absolute address on the control track 42c (see FIGs. 4-5) in the form of address packets. Since control track data is not readily copied from one VCR to another, some copy proteαion is provided. These packets are written in two types of locations. The first type (type 1) is written at the beginning of each program and at d e end of d e last program on die tape. The main funαion of these packets is to serve as "file marks" for search of starting points of programs. The second type of packα (type 2) is asynchronously recorded as often as possible in between the type 1 packets. The main funαion of diese packets is to serve as "road marks" so that on insertion of the cassette 40 into the VCR 1, die current tape location can be quickly determined. As an overview, when an indexed tape is inserted into the VCR 1, die VCR quickly dαermines from surrounding type 2 address packets the exact current tape location. To search for the starting point of some other program, the VCR 1 eidier fast forwards or rewinds and monitors d e control track of the correα destination address packα. Once diis packα is located, die VCR 1 stops and goes back at play speed to land exactly at die destination address packet. Widi die FMAS system, die dαermination of the current location is faster because of die asynchronous sprinkling of addresses. The search for die starting point of a program is accomplished since die VCR 1 monitors die control track 42c while fast forwarding or rewinding and is also accurate since d e destination address packα is written exactly at the start of the program like a file mark. In the FMAS address system, die absolute address is written on die control track 42c of the tape 42 in the form of address packets using die data encoding and decoding described above in conneαion with FIGs. lOa-lOi. The absolute address is a measure of die distance from die beginning of die tape. This distance is preferably determined by counting control track pulses. For example, an address at a point of die tape may be the number of seconds in die SLP mode from the beginning of the tape to that point. Thus, an E-120 tape has an address range from 0 to 21600 (120 minutes x 60 seconds). An address of 1140, for example, defines a point whose distance from the beginning of die tape can be covered in 1,140 seconds in SLP mode. If d e VCR mode is recording or replaying in SP mode from die beginning, men after 380 seconds (1140 seconds ÷ 3), die address is also 1140. If there is a blank space in between two programs, the address system takes that into account. For example, if program 1 is recorded in SLP mode and has an address of 1,000 at the end of fhe program, the tape dien travels some distance before it starts program 2. Since there is no video signal between the end of program 1 and d e beginning of program 2, there are no control track pulses to keep track of the distance travelled. In this case, the takeup spools spindle revolution counts can be used to interpolate. For example, the takeup spool spindle may be counting 1 count for 30 control track pulses, i.e. 1 address count at die end of program 1. At die beginning of program 2, the takeup spool may be counted in two counts for 30 control track pulses, i.e. 1 address count at die beginning of program 2. Thus, on die average, die takeup spool counts 1.5 counts per 30 control track pulses, i.e. 1 address count for the blank space between program 1 and program 2. If die takeup spindle counts 150 counts of blank space, it is assumed the control track would have counted 3,000 control track pulses (150÷ 1.5x30), i.e. 100 address counts. The starting address of program 2 is 1,000 (end of address of program 1) + 100 (length of blank area) = 1,100. The absolute address is written once at die beginning of each program and at die end of die last program. For HR tapes and PR tapes, die address is repeated as often as possible (in the order of once every few seconds) between the beginning and die end of every program. For RI tapes, the address is repeated as often as possible for some programs as will be described in detail below. In alternate embodiments, two separate address systems are used. In a high resolution address system (HRAS), the VCR writes an absolute address at high repetition rate (e.g., once every few seconds) on a line of the VBI. The absolute addressing system is maintained both for finding the current location as well as for calculating the length of programs and blank spaces. The absolute address is a measure of the distance from die beginning of die tape. For example, an address with a value of 1120 may represent a distance from the beginning of the tape after die take-up spool spindle has made 140 revolutions (with 8 counts per revolution). This information may be written once every few seconds. Alternatively, the absolute address may represent the time from the beginning of the tape. Because the play time depends on the recording speed of d e tape, the time from the beginning of the tape should also account for the different tape speeds. The second type of address system is a low resolution address system (LRAS) where the absolute address is written on d e control track at the beginning of each program as well as die end of die last program as an address mark. An alternate LRAS is to write only marks, such as VISS or VASS marks, in the control track at the beginning of each program on the tape and at die end of die tape. FIG. 14 is a schematic view of an alternate embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a high and low resolution addressing system. The HR tapes and die PR tapes employ both die high resolution address system and die low resolution address system. The HRAS is possible because address data can be written onto d e VBI while recording is taking place. For an HR tape, the address and TID are stored in d e VBI and die directory is stored in d e RAM 33. For PR tapes, die address, directory, and TID are stored in die control track 42c. The LRAS uses a marker at die beginning of each program and at die end of the last program. When a HR tape or PR tape is inserted into die VCR 1, die VCR quickly reads die TID and address from die VBI and finds out d e exaα current tape location. On the other hand, d e RI tapes employ die low resolution address system. For RI tapes, an address mark is written on die control track at the beginning of each program and at die end of the last program. The RI tapes cannot in practice employ die high resolution address system because writing a high resolution address requires writing over the whole tape which is too time consuming for the user. Further more, die VBI cannot be retroaαively overridden widiout destroying die picture. On the other hand, a limited amount of data can be overwritten onto the control track, e.g., in a video index search system (VISS). Hence, for retroaαively indexing old tapes, the address data is written on the control track 42c. When an RI tape is inserted into the VCR, d e VCR first dαermines whed er die tape has a high resolution address system. It searches die VBI for die TID and an absolute address. Failing to find diat, die VCR dien looks for the LRAS on die control track. It rewinds die tape to find die closest address mark and reads die address and TID to obtain a current location. To search for die starting point of some other program, the process for HR tapes and PR tapes are as follows. The VCR knows the current absolute address as well as d e destination absolute address. While monitoring the take-up spool spindle revolution count, die machine quickly fast-forwards or rewinds to d e vicinity, typically witiiin 5 seconds of die destination, and dien slows down to play speed to read d e VBI and stop at die correct address. For RI tapes, the first part of the search process is identical to diat of HR and PR tapes. Knowing the current absolute address and d e destination absolute address and while monitoring the take-up spool spindle revolution count, the machine can quickly fast-forward or rewind to die vicinity of die destination. It dien slows down to play speed to read the control track and stop at die correα address mark. To perform a search, for HR and PR tapes, when die tape is inserted into die indexing VCR, the current location of die tape is known from the absolute address on the VBI line. From this address and from the directory recovered from the RAM 33 for HR tapes or from the VBI for PR tapes corresponding to the TID, die current program number is known. For example, if the current program is program 3 and die command is to go to program 6, the VCR must fast forward to land on the third indexing mark, such as a VISS or VASS mark, from the present location. Since the VCR can read die control track during fast forward or rewind, it can read marks stored in die control track. When the third mark is seen during die fast forward, die VCR switches to stop and then rewind since die third mark has been passed. The VCR then switches to play to read the absolute address and can d en "soft-land" on die seleαed address. For RI tapes, once die program number is found, die process is the same. FIG. 15 is a schematic view of another alternate embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and addresses using a high and low resolution addressing system. The HR and PR tapes employ only a HRAS addressing system. As with die embodiment of FIG. 14, die address and TID are stored in die VBI and die directory is stored in the RAM 33. The RI tapes use the LRAS described above in FIG. 14. In this embodiment, when searching is done on HR and LR tapes as described below in FIG. 35, die system measures location on the tape using die spindle revolution counts or position counters described below in FIGs. 38-41. Searching on RI tapes is the same as described above for die embodiment of FIG. 1. FIG. 16 is a schematic view of another embodiment for storing tape identification numbers and program numbers using a VISS PLUS TP data packet address system. In this embodiment, die system writes a TP data packet, which comprises a TID and a program number in line 19 of the VBI. As will be described below, die TP data packet may be written on odier lines of the VBI where a pointer on VBI line 21 points to these other lines. However, the default mode uses line 19. The program number represents the order in which die program was recorded. For example, program 3 is the diird program written on the tape. If program 3 is the last program written on the tape, the next program that is written has a program number of 4, even if die program is physically written on the tape before program 3. The format of the TP packet is described below in conjunαion widi FIGS. 27-29. The recording format for the TP data packet conforms with die E.I.A. specifications on Extended Data Services. As will be described below in conjunction widi FIGs. 28-29, the TID is constant for a tape. The program number is constant within a program, but changes from program to program. As a subsα of the VISS PLUS TP system, the indexing VCR 10 uses a VISS system to write a VISS mark on the control track 42c at the beginning of each program on the tape. RI tapes use only die VISS system. For HR and PR tapes, die VISS PLUS TP system is used. In diis system, die TID and program number are written in TP data packets at a high repetition rate, e.g., about once every 1/12 seconds, on line 19 of both fields of die VBI. The VISS marks on the control track serve as file marks for searching for die starting points of the programs. The TP data packets serve as road marks so that upon insertion of the cassette into the indexing VCR 10, die current tape location can be quickly dαermined. In addition, the address system provides a method for determining die length of programs as they are recorded or modified, as will be described below. As an overview, when an HR or PR tape is inserted into the indexing VCR 10, die indexing VCR 10 scans die VBI for a predetermined time, e.g., two seconds, and quickly dαermines from surrounding TP data packets die TID of die tape and die current program number. When die user presses die Index button, die indexing VCR 10 retrieves the direαory from die RAM 33 and displays it. When the user requests the indexing VCR 10 to move to die starting point of another program, the indexing VCR 10 executes a search by either fast forwarding or rewinding die tape while counting die number of VISS marks in the control track to the destination location. For an RI tape, because the TP data packα is not written on the VBI or elsewhere on die tape, a different mediod is employed. Instead, when a RI tape is ejected from die indexing VCR 10, die current program number at the time of ejeαion (also referred to as an ejeαion program number) is stored in the RAM 33. The next time mat the RI tape is inserted into die indexing VCR 10, die indexing VCR 10 attempts to find a TP packα in die VBI. Because no TP packα is found, die indexing VCR 10 prompts the user to enter the assigned tape number, when the user presses the Index button. Using this number, die indexing VCR 10 dαermines die corresponding TID, recovers from the RAM 33 die ejeαion program number and uses it as die current program number, and displays die directory. At this time, die indexing VCR 10 may search using die search process described above for HR and PR tapes. In summary, Table II shows die directory and address systems for d e 3 types of tapes. Table II Tape Type Direαory Address System HR RAM 33 in indexing VCR 10 VISS+TP PR VBI on tape VISS+TP RI RAM 33 in indexing VCR 10 VISS In an alternate embodiment to the VISS +TP system, the indexing VCR 10 also uses an absolute address system (also called VISS+TP+ AA). Several absolute address systems are described in detail below in conjunαion with FIGs. 38-41. The absolute address system provides faster searches. In some indexing VCRs, the VISS marks cannot be monitored during high speed fast forward or rewind, but only at moderate search speed (semi-load condition). In contrast, the reel ratio can be measured at very high speed fast forward or rewind (unloaded condition). Using die absolute address calculated from die reel ratio, die indexing VCR 10 can search the tape. The absolute address system also provides a more accurate dαermination of die location of the tape. For example, referring now to FIG. 17, a program five is recorded on a previously recorded HR tape starting in die middle of a previously recorded program two and ending after the beginning of a previously recorded program three. As seen in FIG. 17, when program five is recorded, the indexing VCR 10 writes a VISS mark at the beginning of program five and writes a TP packet corresponding to program five in line 19 of die VBI. Upon reaching die start of program three, the indexing VCR 10 erases die VISS mark corresponding to die start of program three and writes a new mark at the end of program five which becomes the start of the remaining portion of program three. With an absolute address system, die indexing VCR 10 can automatically calculate die length of programs two and three and correspondingly update the directory. Widiout an absolute address system, die indexing VCR 10 can flag die lengdi of programs two and three as being unknown and when d e tape is played, measure the length of die programs for a later updating of the directory. Alternatively, in an indexing VCR 10 widiout an absolute address system, the indexing VCR 10 may force new programs to be written at the starting point of an old program to avoid programs of unknown length. VBI Line Conflict Resolution Because various VBI lines are used for different puφoses by different users, die indexing VCR employs a conflict resolution system. As examples of other uses of die VBI, line 21 is used for both closed captioning and Extended Data Services. Line 19 is used in ghost cancellation. Macrovision uses lines 13-20 of field 1, and lines 12-19 of field 2 for copy proteαion in prerecorded tapes. Neilson uses lines 10-12 for encoding of audience survey information in prerecorded tapes. Although line 21 is used for broadcasting purposes, it may be used in prerecorded tapes when there is no close captioning. The VBI lines presendy used by Macro Vision for copy protection may be moved to odier lines at the discretion of die PR tape manufacturer. In addition, less dian eight lines may be used widi some copy protection efficiency loss. After reception of die broadcast signal, die use of line 19 has served its puφose and becomes free for writing the TP packet. Thus, for PR tapes, there is no broadcasted line 19 conflict. However, with PR tapes, if some tapes cannot use line 19 or line 20 or both, die write of TP and D(N) packets may be done on odier lines by using pointers, which are written on line 21, field 2, to diese odier lines as described above according to die E.I.A. specifications for supplemental data location. When only one of lines 19 or 20 are available, the TP packets and die D(N) packets may be written onto one line. Accordingly, even in die absence of pointers on line 21, the indexing VCR 10 checks lines 19 and 20 for the presence of both TP and D(N) packets. Interconnected VCRs Multiple indexing VCRs in die same household create a special problem. The user wants to use an indexed tape interchangeably between all of his indexing VCRs. However, since the direαory of HR and RI tapes resides in die VCR and does not travel with d e tape, the consequence may seem to be that tapes can only be used in die VCR in which diey are created. To solve this problem, the different indexing VCRs in the same household are able to communicate. Referring now to FIGs. 1 and 18, a multiple VCR system 8000 comprises a plurality of indexing VCR systems 10 connected by a bus cable 8006 to a bi-directional bus 8004. The microprocessor controller 31 transmits and receives data and commands over a line 8007 to a bus interface circuit 71 which processes data to communicate between the microprocessor controller 31 and die bus 8004. In a first embodiment of die bus system, any VCR system 10 on die bus 8004 can acquire die bus and become the talker (also referred to as a driver). At any one time, only one talker is allowed on die bus. During this time, all other units are listeners. Once the related activities are finished, die talker must give up the bus. The bus interface circuit 71 comprises a transmitter (not shown) for driving signals on die bus and a receiver (not shown) for receiving signals from die bus. The transmitter is preferably a TTL open colleαor driver. The bus driver preferably is capable of sourcing 48ma. In addition, it is pulled up to +5 volts by an internal 150 ohm resistor which can be removed to prevent overloading of die bus driver if more than two VCR systems 10 are connected to the bus 8004. In addition, die bus 8004 is preferably aαive low and stays at the high state when there is no bus aαivities. The receiver preferably has a maximum load of one standard TTL load on die bus. The data on d e bus is preferably serial data comprising data cells. Each data cell is defined as die time slot between two high to low transitions. The bit length is typically 2.0 milliseconds. Data is preferably encoded in Manchester code. A "zero" is defined as a 25% low to 25% low between the high to low transition and die low to high transition. Conversely, a "one" is defined as a 50% low to 75% low between the high to low transition and die low to high transition. The bus interface circuit 71 communicates over line 8011 dirough a connector 8008 to the line 8006. The connector 8008 is preferably an RCA phono female connector. Having described die multiple VCR system 8000, the operation of the system is now described. One of die VCR systems 10 becomes an initiating unit by desiring to eidier transmit or receive data over die bus 8004. In particular, when a new home made recording tape is created in a VCR system 10, mat VCR communicates this information to the odier VCR system 10 on die bus 8004. To request this data, die microprocessor controller 31 of the initiating unit sends a command over die line 8007 to the bus interface 71 for communication over lines 8011 and 8006 with die bus 8004. The microprocessor controller 31 preferably generates one of two types of commands. The first command, a type I command, is a one-to-many broadcast command. All units on the bus odier than the initiating unit, which acts as the talker, are addressed. There is no feedback from the addressed units. Thus, for die type I commands, data always flows only from die talker to the listener. The second type of command, a type II command, is a one-to-one communication type. Only one unit is addressed at a time. For the type II commands, die addressed unit sends data to die initiating unit in response to a request for information command from the initiating unit, or die initiating unit sends data to die addressed unit in response to a send information command. Table V summarizes the bus commands. TABLE V Command Tvue Pesαiptions FFFFhex I All units receive library lAAAhex II Address unit AAA to report library RAM size 2AAAhex π Address unit AAA to receive library Others (Reserved for future expansion) The bus control commands are bracketed by a leading zero and a trailing zero. An end bit follows die trailing zero. The end bit is the last high to low and back to high transition. Thus, it is a "hair bit. It is not a data bit but a terminator bit. Its widdi is preferably 2 to 4 times the widdi of die regular bit lengd . Referring now to FIG. 19, die initiating unit (VCR system 10) is a listener and monitors the bus 8004 for 0.5 seconds to ensure diat there is no bus aαivity (step 8012). When there is no bus aαivity (step 8014), the initiating unit becomes a talker and takes control of die bus. The initiating unit transmits a type I-command code (FFFFhex) onto die bus to command all units to receive the library (step 8016). The initiating unit dien becomes a listener, and monitors the bus aαivity for 0.25 seconds for a response (step 8018). If diere is bus aαivity (step 8020), die initiating unit abandons its attempt to become bus controller by aborting the command (step 8022) and resets its internal status to become a listener (step 8024), thereby releasing control of die bus (step 8030). On the odier hand, if tiiere is no bus aαivity after the command code is transmitted (step 8020), the initiating unit again becomes a talker and sends die data in the library within .25 seconds after determining it controls the bus (step 8026). After transmitting all the data, die initiating unit waits 0.5 seconds (step 8028), becomes a listener, and releases bus control (step 8030). Referring now to FIG. 20, die library data is transmitted as a data packα 8032. The data packα 8032 has a leading zero 8034 followed by a start code 8036 having a length of one byte. The start code 8036 preferably has a value of Olhex. Following the start code, there is a type code 8038 having a one byte long symbol. Its value preferably is between Olhex and FFhex. The type code 8038 is decoded as follows in Table IV. TABLE IV Type Descriptions Olhex Library RAM size packα 02hex Library packet 03 hex-FFhex (Reserved for future expansion) Following the type code 8038, a data content 8040 contains the direαory or odier information that is to be transmitted. The data content 8040 has an n byte length and is preferably coded in ASCII. In die preferred embodiment, only ASCII symbols '0'-'9' and 'A'-'Z' are used. An end code 8042 having a length of 1 byte follows die data content 8040. The end code 8042 preferably has a value of 03hex. Next, the data packα includes a checksum 8044 that is 1 byte long. The checksum makes the modulo 128 sum of die whole data packα 0, i.e., modulo 128 (start code 8036 + type code 8038 + data content 8040 + end code 8042 + checksum 8044) = 0. A trailing zero 8046 followed by an end bit 8048 follow the checksum 8044. Referring now to FIG. 21, a type II command having a value of lAAAhex is a request from the initiating unit to an addressed unit AAA to report its library RAM size. In order to take control of the bus 8004, the initiating unit operates as a listener and monitors die bus for .5 seconds (step 8060) and determines whedier the bus is available. If diere is no bus aαivity (step 8062), then die bus 8004 is available and die initiating unit becomes a talker and sends die command code 1 AAAhex on die bus 8004 (step 8064). The initiating unit dien becomes a listener and monitors the bus 8004 for .25 seconds for a response from the addressed unit (step 8066). If there is no response from the addressed unit (step 8068), die initiating unit aborts its command (step 8070) and resets its internal status (step 8072). On the odier hand, if, at step 8068, there is a response by the addressed unit, die initiating units checks the integrity of the returned data (step 8074). If there is a failure in the integrity check, the initiating unit aborts its command (step 8070) and resets its internal status (step 8072). However, if the integrity check passes at step 8074, the addressed unit becomes the talker on the bus 8004 and transmits the data (step 8076). The addressed unit releases die bus after 0.5 seconds (step 8078). For a type II command in which an addressed unit is to receive a library, die flow chart of FIG. 19 is followed for type I commands, except that at step 8026 when the initiating unit is the talker and sends data, d e initiating unit sends the library to the addressed unit AAA in response to a type II 2 AAAhex command. Another Bus Embodiment Bus Description In a second embodiment of die bus system, die bus 8004 is a bi-direαional bus. An external device 73, such as an external RAM, is coupled to the sub 8004. A description of the external device 73 is described below. Within die bus interface circuit 71, a transmitter (not shown) is a TTL open collector driver preferably capable of sinking 16 milliamps. A driver (not shown) is preferably pulled up to +5V by an internal 1.0 kiloohm resistor. The receiver provides a maximum load to d e bus of one standard TTL load. The bus 8004 is preferably active low. When there are no bus activities, the bus 8004 stays at the high state. The driver drives die bus by pulling die bus 8004 low. Preferably, the indexing VCR 10 is die master of the bus 8004 and initiates all transaαions on the bus. The data on die bus 8004 is preferably transmitted serially. The data is defined by data cells where each data cell is defined to be the time slot between two successive high to low transitions. The bit length is preferably from 0.2 milliseconds to 2 milliseconds. The data is preferably encoded by 7 bits with an odd parity LSB bit providing a total length of 8 bits first Manchester coding mediod. The separation between bytes preferably is 1 to 10 milliseconds. The communication is reset, if no data is transmitted for longer than 10 milliseconds, to avoid bus lock ups. Bus control protocol and command packet format The indexing VCR 10 sends over die bus 8004 a bus command packα to die external device 73 to request data. The command packα has a format: Command [ data ] 1 byte N byte The command symbol is one byte long and ranges in value from 00 hex to 7F hex. A data symbol follows the command symbol and ranges in length from 0 to N bytes of data. N can be sufficiendy large so diat die data byte includes die entire directory of a tape. In response to the command packα, die external device 73 sends back eidier a return code or data based on die command issued by die indexing VCR 10. Table VI lists the commands for the bus. Table VI Command Data Description Olhex Check if external device 73 is ready. 02hex PRI Print PRI data. 03hex directory Send direαory to RAM 33. 04hex Request for the first TID stored in RAM 33. 05hex Request for the next TID stored in RAM 33. 06hex Request for the previous TID stored in RAM 33. 07hex TID Request external device 73 to send. and the Xth entry of the specified tape, number X 08hex TID Request external device 73 to send copy version number of the tape specified. 09hex TID Request external device 73 to send program number for next recording for die specified tape. Others Reserved for later expansion. The indexing VCR 10 issues a Olhex command on d e bus 8004 to check if die external device 73 is ready. This command is preferably issued before odier commands to check die device. After issuing die command, die indexing VCR 10 waits for the return code. If OOhex is returned on d e bus, die external device 73 is ready. If 7F hex is returned, die external device 73 is busy. If no response is received on die bus, die commanded external device 73 may be non-existent. The indexing VCR 10 retransmits the command to again check status. The indexing VCR 10 stops further commands to die external device 73, if die device is not ready. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 02hex command on the bus to command die external device 73 to print PRI data. After issuing the command packet, die indexing VCR 10 issues die PRI packα to the external device 73. If die external device 73 accepts the packet, it -returns a OOhex code. Otherwise, it returns a 7F hex code. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 03hex command to save die direαory of one tape to the external RAM 33. Before transmitting the direαory, die indexing VCd 10 reformats the information into e D(N) and TP packet format described below in conneαion widi FIGs. 25 and 27, respeαively. The first packα includes die TID and die copy version number (described below) in die same format as die TP packα. The next packet is die D(0) packet which describes the tape paramαers, including tape length and reel diameter. The remaining directory entries are transmitted in e D(N) packet format in the order of dieir location from die beginning of the tape. A TP packα is sent after the last D(N) packα to indicate the end of transmission. This TP packα includes die ΗD and d e program number for the next recording. The external device 73 returns a OOhex code, if it receives all packets. Otherwise, it returns a 7F hex code. In response thereto, the indexing VCR 10 may resend die data. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 04hex command to request die first ΗD stored in the external RAM 73. In response thereto, the external device 73 returns die first ΗD stored therein. In combination widi die 05hex and Oόhex commands (to be described below), die indexing VCR 10 can use die 04hex command to read out all die TIDs in die external RAM 73. The external device 73 returns a 7F hex code, if there is no ΗD inside die device 73. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 05hex command to request the next TID stored in die external RAM 73. In response therαo, the external RAM 73 returns the next ΗD in the RAM 73. After the last ΗD is returned, the external RAM 73 returns a 7F hex code. The indexing VCR 10 issues a Oόhex command to request die previous ΗD stored in the external RAM 73. In response thereto, die external RAM 73 returns the previous ΗD in die RAM 73. This allows the indexing VCR 10 to read the ΗD in reverse order. After the first ΗD is returned, die external RAM 73 returns a 7F hex code. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 07hex command and a TP like packet, which includes die TID and a number x, to request die xώ directory entry of the specified tape. In response thereto, the external device 73 returns die xth direαory entry of the tape in a D(N) packet format. If, however, the TID is not in the external RAM 73, it returns a 7F hex code. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 08hex command and die TID in TP packα format widi PN sα to 0 to request the copy version number. In response thereto, the external device 73 returns a TP line packα which includes die TID and die copy version number. If, however, the TID is not inside die external RAM 73, it returns a 7F hex code. The indexing VCR 10 issues a 09hex command and die TID in TP packα widi PN sα to 0 to request die program number for the next recording. In response thereto, the external device 73 returns a TP like packα which includes die ΗD and die program number for die next recording. If, however, die TID is not in the external RAM 73, it returns a 7F hex code. The copy version number is a 12 bit number used to check the updated status of the directory in the external RAM 73. The indexing VCR 10 stores a copy version number for each tape in the RAM 33. When a new tape is created, this number is set to zero. Every time the directory content is changed, die indexing VCR 10 increments the number by one. When a copy of a directory having die same TID is found in both die external RAM 73 and die internal RAM 33, die indexing VCR 10 uses die more updated version which is identified by comparing the copy version number and using die higher number. In this embodiment, die copy version number ranges from 0 to 4095. In alternate embodiments, the bus interface 71 may be packaged external to die VCRs. In diese embodiments, the microprocessor controller 31 communicates over die line 8007 directiy to the connector 8011. The bus interface 71 is connected external to die indexing VCR 10 to die connector 8011 and to die bus 8004. In yα other embodiments, the method of communication may be either radio transmission at UHF or modulation on an AC power line. One method for transmitting signals on AC power lines is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,418,333 to Schwarzbach, α al., issued November 29, 1983, the subject matter of which is incorporated herein by reference. INTERFACE PORT Referring again to FIG. 1, the VCR system 10 has an interface connector 72 which is coupled to d e microprocessor controller 31 and allows communication between the microprocessor controller 31 and an external device 73. The conneαor 72 is preferably an RCA phono female connector. The external device 73 may be a memory, a printer, a computer, a telephone line or a specialized machine for communicating wid die microprocessor controller 31. In a specific implementation, the microprocessor controller 31 communicates widi a printer to print coupons captured using die Auxiliary Information feature described below. In anodier specific implementation, the microprocessor controller 31 may print the tape identification number labels for marking the cassette housing. For example, instead of die step 9211 described below in FIG. 57 in which the microprocessor controller 31 displays die TID assigned to the tape that is about to be ejected, the microprocessor controller 31 commands the printer to print a label widi d e assigned TID and prompts the user on the display to affix the label to the cassette housing. In yα another specific implementation, die microprocessor controller 31 prints upon user command die directory of any specified tapes stored in die RAM 33. In an alternate embodiment, in place of the interface connector, an IR detector/emitter in the VCR functions as a data port which can be used to both receive remote control commands and to transmit the directory or odier information from the RAM 33 to a printer or a second machine. For example, some VCRs can control cable boxes by transmitting commands to the cable box. These VCRs may also transmit direαory data or other information to an external device 73 diat can receive IR commands. Alternatively, die IR detector may also be used to receive directory information downloaded from die second machine. In an alternate embodiment to FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 18, die interface connector 72 may be the same conneαor as the bus interface connector 71. In this embodiment, a plurality of external devices 73, 73' may be conneαed to the bus 8004. The direαory may be downloaded from d e RAM 33 through a bus transfer to any or all of die plurality of external devices. In a specific implementation, the directory is downloaded eidier over d e bus 8004 or through the interface conneαor 72 for backup storage. For example, backup storage may be eidier a tape in a second VCR or a floppy disk in a disk drive. In anodier specific implementation, the external device 73 is a nonvolatile memory such as a battery supported RAM. The external RAM 73 contains sufficient memory, e.g., one megabits, for storing die entire program directory of a plurality of indexing VCRs. The external RAM 73 provides a backup to the RAM 33 in each of the user's indexing VCR 10s to avoid loss of data during power interruptions. Further, die external RAM 73 combines the libraries of all indexing VCRs conneαed to d e bus 8004. Consequentiy, each indexing VCR 10 provides indexing capability for each of the user's index tapes. The user may transfer direαories between the indexing VCRs. The external RAM 73 also includes communication electronics for communicating with each device on die bus. In yα anodier embodiment, e external device 73 might also include a processor and a charaαer generator. The indexing VCR 10 provides die electronic guide data over the I/O port. The external device 73 captures the data, formats it and stores it within die external RAM. At the appropriate times, the data is outputted via the charaαer generator over the bus 8004 to the indexing VCR 10 for display on die television. Alternatively, die bus may be an infrared link where die external device 73 has IR emitters and detectors for transmitting and receiving infrared codes to die indexing VCR 10 and television using the infrared detectors and emitters described above. Similar to the bus interface, communication from die interface port may be either direct cable, radio transmission at UHF, infrared transmission, or modulation on an AC power line, or odier memory or communication devices. Automatic Back-up of the Library in the RAM 33 As noted above, the library is stored in a nonvolatile memory or a battery backed-up RAM 33. Although lithium batteries have a 5-7 year shelf life, this life may be shortened by power outages. In addition, catastrophic chip failures may occur. Consequendy, die indexing VCR 10 periodically displays a prompt to the user to back-up the library by downloading me contents from the RAM 33 through the serial port to a magnetic tape, floppy disk or external memory device. Even with this prompt, some users are likely to not back-up the library. In addition, if a low battery warning is provided, die user may also ignore ύiis warning. When the failure occurs, the user will have experienced a catastrophic loss of his entire library when the battery has been drained or die memory chip has failed. The library may be recreated as each tape is played for die first time after the loss in die indexing VCR 10. However, this approach is time consuming and limits the user's ability to perform search functions of the tape library. The indexing VCR 10 may automatically provide back-up by writing the directory onto a tape while it is making another recording. In particular, die indexing VCR 10 may write the whole library onto a predetermined VBI line. For example, a 250k bit library may be backed-up during one recording, e.g., assuming 16 bits per line and 1 line per field at 60 fields per second, it takes 273 seconds to complete this library back-up. Because most recordings are at least half an hour long, die backing-up is completed before the recording has been completed. A nonvolatile memory, such as an EEPROM, may be included as part or separate to the microprocessor controller 31 in the indexing VCR 10 for storing die location of the library copy, the TTD, and the program number or address of die tape on which the direαory is recorded. As a back-up to die tape being either defeαive or recorded over in a non-indexing VCR 10, die locations of die latest three copies of the library can be stored in die EEPROM. Upon the occurrence of a battery failure or a RAM chip failure, after the indexing VCR 10 is repaired, the indexing VCR 10 can display a prompt on screen to request die user to insert die tape containing d e latest copy of the library by displaying die tape number corresponding to that tape. Upon insertion of the tape, the indexing VCR 10 verifies die TID of the tape and is able to advance or rewind to the location of the directory using die read program number and the destination program number read die EEPROM. As die tape is being read, the indexing VCR 10 uploads die library packα into d e RAM 33. Data Formats For the data packets described below in conjunction with FIGs. 22-29, a byte refers to a seven bit data symbol plus an eighth bit which is reserved for a parity bit. FIG. 22 is a schematic view showing the data format for the directory recorded on pre-recorded tapes. A data packα 9100 begins with a start code 9101 having a length of one byte. The start code 9101 preferably has a value of 01 hex. A type code 9102 follows die start code 9101. The type code has a length of one byte. The type code 9102 preferably has a value 0X01. The next two bytes are a number of tides symbol 9103. The number of tides symbol 9103 represents the binary number coded in seven bit ASCII for die number of tides in die directory. In die preferred embodiment, only ASCII symbols '0'-'9' and 'A'-'Z' are used. For example the ASCII string 'IF' represents the number 1FX. Since two ASCII characters are used, die largest number of tides is FF hex (256). Following die number of tides symbol 9103, a first program entry 9104, a second program entry 9105, and an Nth program 9106 contain the information related to N programs (FIG. ■ ¬ ii shows only the first, second and Ndi program entries for simplicity and clarity). Each program entry is a fixed length and contains a group of 37 byte long symbols. The first four bytes represent die binary address coded in seven bit ASCII, in a manner similar to that described above, for die number of tides symbol 9103. For example, die ASCII charaαers string "3F1A" represents the address of 3F1A hex. Since four ASCII charaαers are used, the largest number is FFFF hex (65535). The fifth byte of die program entry represents the recording mode. A value 0X00 is die Standard Play (SP) mode, a value 0X01 is die Long Play (LP) mode, a value 0X10 is die Super Long Play (SLP) mode, and die values 0X11-0X7F are reserved. The remaining 32 bytes of the program entry represent the program tide code. The program tide code is preferably coded in seven bit ASCII. An end code 9107 having a 1 byte long symbol follows die Nth program entry 9106. The end code 9107 preferably has a value 03 hex. The data packet 9100 ends widi a checksum 9108 that is one byte long symbol. The checksum 9108 makes the modulo 128 sum of die whole data packα equal to zero, i.e., modulo 128 (start code 9101 + type code 9102 + number of tides 9103 + program entries 9104, 9105, 9106 + end code 9107 + checksum 9108) equals zero. For prerecorded tapes, the directory is repeated as often as space allows in die VBI. Typically this means once every few seconds. FIG. 23 is a schematic view showing die data packα format for the absolute address packα. An absolute address data packα 9110 is written at the start of each program, at the end of die tape, and periodically during each program. The data packet 9110 has a start code 9111 having a length of one byte. The start code 9111, preferably has a value of 01 hex. Following the start code, diere is a type code 9112 having a one byte long symbol. The type code 9112 preferably has a value of 0X02 hex. An absolute address 9113 follows the type code 9112 and has a length of four bytes. The absolute address 9113 represents the address coded in seven bit ASCII. As widi the program entries 9104 desαibed above in FIG. 22, only ASCII symbols O'-'9"A-Z' are used. For example, ASCII charaαer string '3F1A' represents the absolute address of 3F1A hex. Since four ASCII characters are used, die largest number of absolute addresses is FFFF hex (65535). The address is measured as die number of take-up spool spindle revolution counts (typically at 8 counts per revolution) from the beginning of the tape. An end code 9114 having a length of one byte follows the absolute address 9113. The end code 9114 preferably has a value of 03 hex. The absolute address data packα 9110 ends widi a checksum 9115 having a one byte long symbol. The checksum makes the modulo 128 sum of the absolute address packet equal to zero, i.e., modulo 128 (start code 9111 + type code 9112 + absolute address 9113 + end code 91114 + checksum 9115) equals zero. The absolute address packα 9110 is repeated as often as possible on a line of die VBI, but is interleaved widi d e tape I.D. packα to be described below in FIG. 24. In the case of pre-recorded tapes, the absolute address packα 9110 is also interleaved widi die directory packα. FIG. 24 is a schematic view showing die data packα format for die tape identification number (TID). For PR tapes, the tape I.D. is written repeatedly on one line of die VBI. For HR and RI tapes, the TID is written on the control track after the address mark at die beginning of each program and at die end of the last program. For HR tapes, the TID is also repeated as often as possible on die tape preferably once every few seconds. For RI tapes, during die first pass of re-indexing, diese are no other TIDS. During die next play of die tape, additional TIDS are inserted as often as possible, preferably on die order of once every few seconds. In addition, die TIDS are interleaved with an address packα. As will be described below, die TID is a 48 bit number for HR and RI tapes. This number is composed of a header, a random machine identification number, and a tape number. Consequendy, die danger of tapes having the same identification will be minimized. For PR tapes, the TID corresponds to the UPC code of die tape (a 12 digit number). This way city libraries, tape rental or retail stores can all adopt die TID of die indexing system. A TID data packα 9120 is twelve bytes long. For the ΗD data packα, a byte refers to a seven bit data symbol plus an eighth bit which is reserved for a parity bit. The data packα 9120 begins widi a start code 9121 having a length of one byte. The start code 9121 preferably has a value 01 hex. Following die start code 9121, a type code 9122 having a one byte long symbol and preferably has a value 0X04. A tape I.D. 9123 follows the type code 9122 and is eight bytes long. As noted above, the tape I.D. 9123 is determined differently for the type of tape. For a PR tape, the tape I.D. 9123 is a twelve digit UPC code which is a 48 bit number with most significant bit (MSB) of less than 0F0 hex. For HR and RI tapes, the tape identification 9123 is composed of three parts. The first part is an eight bit header in die MSB which is equal to OFF hex. The next 24 bits are an identification generated by a random number sequence to generate a high probability of uniqueness for each VCR. The 24 bit machine I.D. is created as a random number which is seeded by some condition diat will most likely be different between users. In a first implementation the 24 bits is broken into two twelve bit numbers. At die first power up of die VCR, die counter is initialized widi counting pulses of less man .25 milliseconds duration. The counter is stopped by die user's first and second key pressing on the remote controller. These two twelve bit random numbers are then combined to form die machine identification. Because die counter is very fast and die key pressed by die user is very random, die machine identification should be sufficiendy random so diat two VCR's will have a chance of approximately one out of sixteen million to have identical machine I.D.'s. A 16 bit tape number follows the machine I.D. which allows for 65536 tapes in one VCR. An end code 9124 follows die tape I.D. 9123 and is one byte long. The end code 9124 preferably has a value of 03 hex. A checksum 9125 follows die end code 9124 and is one byte long. The checksum 9125 makes the modulo 128 sum of the whole directory packet zero, i.e., modulo 128 of (start code 9121 + type code 9122 + tape I.D. 9123 + end code 9124 + checksum 9125) equals zero. In an alternate embodiment, die machine identification portion of die 48 bits of the tape I.D. 9123 may be the Julien day, hour, and minute when the VCR is first put into use. Second Embodiment of Data Format FIG. 25 is a schematic view showing the format for the directory packα recorded in die VBI for prerecorded tapes. The direαory preferably provides up to 32 charaαers per table. A D(N) packα 2601 has the following symbols: start code, type, N, start address, stop address, record speed, program category, version, language, tide text, expand byte, stop code and checksum. Table VII shows the length in bytes and the value for each symbol. The N symbol represents the program number in the direαory when N is greater than 0. Each byte is a coded text number from 30 hex to 3F hex which equates to 0 hex to F hex (when N equals 0, the packα described below in conjunαion with FIG. 26 is used to represent the tide of die tape). The start address symbol represents the number of minutes measured in die SLP mode from die beginning of the tape to the beginning of die program. The stop address symbol represents d e number of minutes measured in d e SLP mode from the beginning of the tape to the end of die program. Each byte of the start address and stop address symbols is a coded hexadecimal number from 30 hex to 3F hex which form a number having die largest possible value of FFF hex. A record speed symbol defines die recording speed of die program. The recording speed symbol represents the optimal tape speed at which die indexing VCR 10 should record die program. For example, a super long play speed may be transmitted for programs, such as sports or nature programs, where the user may want to use die freeze frame feature. As anodier example, a standard play speed may be transmitted for recording long programs so as to conserve tape. If the recording speed is defined to be blank, the length is defined based on SLP for better resolution. An "undefined" recording speed is used when die recording speed changes during a program. Undefined values are reserved for further expansion. A program category (PC) symbol is defined per the E.I.A. definition. The version symbol identifies die version of the program tided format. For versions other than 20 hex, the indexing VCR 10 ignores the following bytes up to a terminator code (which is preferably IE hex) and displays die tided text as a blank line. A language symbol represents different languages. The tide text symbol has a length of M bytes where M is a variable even number, preferably not greater than 40, including die IE hex terminator code. The tide text symbol represents the program tide in ASCII and is terminated by die charaαer IE hex. If die charaαer number is odd, one more null charaαer is added before the terminator code. In addition, an attribute charaαer can be added to the tide text to enhance die indexing display. The attribute charaαer starts with a value of ID hex which is followed by a charaαer in the range 20 hex to 7F hex. Attribute codes are defined below in conjunαion with FIG. 55. The expand byte symbol has a lengdi of N bytes where N is a variable even number from 0 to 6. The expand bytes are used for expansion code for die indexing VCR 10. The checksum symbol is defined as die modulo 128 sum of die packα from the start code to die stop code. As will be described below, die D(N) data packα 2601 is encrypted and must be decrypted by an algorithm in the microprocessor controller 31 (FIG. 1) or the chip 702 (FIG. 7) in the indexing VCR 10. Table VII Symbol Start Code Type N Start Address Stop Address Record Speed Program category (PC) definition. PC Extension 1 20 hex: non-broadcast indexed material. 21 hex: video magazine. 22 hex: sales catalog. 23 hex: classified ads. 24 hex: 7F hex: reserved. Version Language English Tide text m hex byte Stop Code Checksum FIG. 26 is a schematic view showing the format for the directory packα D(0) for the tape tide recorded in die VBI for prerecorded tapes. A D(0) data packα 2602 has the following symbols in order: start code, type, N, length, reserve, reel diamαer, reserved, version, language, tide text, expand byte, stop code and checksum. Table VIII shows the length in bytes and the value of each symbol. The D(0) data packα 2602 is similar to the D(N) data packα 2601 described below in FIG. 71 where die paramαers, start address, stop address, PC, and record speed are redefined to denote the length of tape and d e reel diamαer. The D(0) data packα 2602 is predefined as die tape parameter packet for both HR and PR tapes. The length symbol indicates die lengdi of the tape in minutes at die SLP speed. Each byte is a coded hexadecimal number which provides a value in the range of 000 hex to FFF hex. The reel diamαer symbol indicates die physical diameter of d e tape reel in millimeters. The version symbol indicates die version of d e tape tide format. For versions other than 20 hex (die first version), die indexing VCR 10 ignores the following bytes up to d e terminator code contained within die tide text symbol and displays die text tide as blank line. The language symbol represents the different languages around die world. Other values for die language symbol may be defined by die manufacturer of the indexing VCR 10. The lengdi of die tide text is in bytes where M is a variable even number including the terminator code. The tide text symbol represents the tape tide in ASCII and is terminated by d e charaαer IE hex. If the charaαer number is odd, one null charaαer is added before d e terminator code IE hex. An attribute charaαer can be added to die text at a later stage. The expand byte symbol has a lengdi of N bytes where N is a variable odd number ranging from zero to five. The value of die check sum is die modulo 128 sum of the packet from the start code to the stop code. Table VIII Symbol Length (Bytes Va jg Start Code 1 07 hex Type 1 7E hex N Byte 1, 2, 3: 30 hex, 30 hex, 30 hex Length Each byte coded hex number 03 hex to 3F hex Reserve Reel Diameter Reserved Version Language Tide text Expand Byte Stop Code 1 OF hex. Checksum 2 00 hex - 7F hex FIG. 27 is a schematic view showing die format for a TP packα recorded on die VBI for HR tapes and PR tapes. A TP packα 2603 contains both die TID 2604 and die program number. The TP packα has the following symbols: start code, type, TID, reserved, N, stop code and check sum. Table DC shows the lengdi in bytes and die value for each symbol. The TID symbol contains 10 bytes where each byte represents 4 bits, as will be described for d e TID described in FIG. 28 for an HR tape and in FIG. 29 for a PR tape. The N symbol is defined to be die program number with each byte representing four bits for a total length of twelve bits. For communication between the indexing VCR 10 and the external device 73, die 12 bit item N may be used for other purposes. The checksum is die modulo 128 sum of the packα from die start code to the stop code. Stop Code 1 OF hex Checksum 2 00 - 7F hex FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the TID for an HR tape. The TID 2604 is a 5 byte number. Bit 39 and bits 38-31 are 0. Bits 30-16 are die machine ID. Bits 15-0 are die tape number. As described above, the 15 bit machine ID is a random number generated by die indexing VCR 10 at its first power up. This provides a 1 in 32,768 probability that two indexing VCRs have identical machine IDs. A 16 bit tape number allows each indexing VCR 10 to have 65,536 tapes stored in d e RAM 33. Alternatively, die tape number may be composed of a different number of bits. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the TID for a PR tape. As with die TID for an HR tape, die TID for a PR tape is a 5 byte number. Bit 39 is one, bits 38-0 are die eleven digit UPC number represented in binary form without die parity digit. By using die UPC number, businesses, such as libraries, tape rental stores, and retail outiets, can adopt die ΗD. Accordingly, usage of PR tapes can be monitored and analyzed. When die ΗD is stored into die RAM 33, 5 bytes is preferred. However, if only 4 bytes are recorded, bits 0-30 and bit 39 are stored in the RAM 33. Operation FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of an indexing VCR using a FMAS addressing system for writing a tape identification number, an address, and a directory to a home recorded tape (HR tape) during recording or ejeαion. When a tape is in the VCR and die direαory controller 30 knows the present tape identification number and die current address, die VCR is ready for recording on die tape or ejeαing die tape (step 9200). The microprocessor controller 31 reads the TID and die address from the control track 42c. For existing HR tapes, the ΗD and address are read from die control track 42c. For a new blank tape, the microprocessor controller 31 assigns a TID to the tape and resets the address to zero. The microprocessor controller 31 waits for either a record signal or an ejeα command. If a record signal is received (step 9201), d e microprocessor controller 31 reads the program identification number from the VBI of d e signal diat is to be recorded (step 9202). It is assumed diat die microprocessor controller 31 has already retrieved d e direαory for d e inserted tape if the inserted tape is an existing HR tape. For a new blank tape, the microprocessor controller 31 creates a new directory in the RAM 33. For mis recording, die microprocessor controller 31 initializes the address, die tide and die tape speed in die RAM 33. If no tide is read from the VBI (step 9202), die microprocessor controller 31 uses a date time stamp as the tide (Step 9203). The microprocessor controller 31 then commands die VCR control logic circuit 21 and subsequendy the control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to write die TID and the address on die control track 42c. (Step 9204) The microprocessor controller 31 continues to write the date and address on die control track 42c until a command to stop recording is received. (Step 9206) The microprocessor control 31 then returns to a ready state where it awaits a further command at step 9200. On the other hand, if a command to eject die tape is received (Step 9207), die microprocessor controller 31 updates die direαory that is stored in die RAM 33, including die current tape location (current LOC) flag 1049 (See FIG. 3) which indicates die absolute address of die location of die tape when the tape is ejeαed referenced to the beginning of the tape. If the tape is a new blank tape (Step 9209), the microprocessor controller 31 displays on the video display 50a die tape number of the tape, so that the user can then mark the housing of die cassette 40 with tiiis new number for subsequent identification. The VCR control logic circuit 21 dien commands die motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to ejeα the tape (Step 9212). FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of an indexing VCR using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system of writing a tape identification and a program number to a home recorded tape (HR tape) during recording. Like steps to FIG. 30 have like numbers. When a tape is in the VCR and die direαory controller 30 knows the present tape identification and die current program number, the indexing VCR 10 is ready for recording on die tape or ejecting the tape (step 9200). The microprocessor controller 31 reads die ΗD and die program number from the VBI. For a new blank tape, the microprocessor controller 31 assigns a ΗD to die tape and resets the program number to one. The microprocessor controller 31 waits for either a record signal or an ejeα command. When a record signal is received (step 9201), die microprocessor controller 31 reads die program identification (Program I.D.) from line 21, field 2 of die VBI of die signal diat is to be recorded (step 9202). It is assumed d at die microprocessor controller 31 has already retrieved die directory for the inserted tape if the inserted tape is an existing HR tape. For a new blank tape, the microprocessor controller 31 creates a new directory in the RAM 33. For this recording, die microprocessor controller 31 initializes the program number (and address in VCRs having an absolute address system), the tide, die tape speed, length, and die program category in the RAM 33. If no tide is read from the VBI (step 9202), die microprocessor controller 31 uses a date-time stamp as the tide. (Step 9203') The microprocessor 31 then commands the VCR control logic circuit 21 and subsequendy die control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to continuously write die TID and the program number as a TP data packα on line 19 of the VBI (Step 9204'), until a command to stop recording is received. (Step 9206) The microprocessor control 31 then returns to a ready state where it awaits a further command at step 9200. On d e odier hand, when a command to ejeα die tape is received (Step 9207), if die tape is a new blank tape (Step 9209), die microprocessor controller 31 displays on d e video display 50a die tape number of die tape, so that die user can then mark the housing of die cassette 40 with this new number for subsequent identification. The VCR control logic circuit 21 dien commands die motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to ejeα the tape (Step 9212). After the indexing VCR 10 has started a recording, it reads line 21 field 2 to find the title of the show and write it into the directory in the RAM 33. If die clock of the indexing VCR 10 has not been sα correctiy or if the program starts slighdy later than scheduled, die retrieved tide may be at of die previous program. In one embodiment, die indexing VCR 10 waits a predαermined time, such as 30 seconds, after the recording starts before reading and storing the tide. On die odier hand, for the recording of broadcasted video magazines, die indexing VCR 10 may read and store the tide right after receiving the VM packet, because die VM packet and die new seαion tide are synchronized. Retroartivelv Indexing A Previously Recorded Tape FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing die steps employed to write a tape identification, an absolute address and a directory to create a retroaαively indexed tapes by an indexing VCR using a FMAS or LRAS addressing system. As described above, die retroaαively indexed (RI) tape has a preexisting plurality of programs recorded diereon. A user who has a VCR or camcorder before owning an indexing VCR also has an existing colleαion of video tapes. The user may want to retroaαively create an index of each tape to be able to utilize die indexing capabilities of the indexing VCR. Thus, in die preferred embodiment, the directory is created and stored in die RAM 33, and die TID and die absolute addresses are stored on die control track 42C of the RI tape. The user inserts the un-indexed recorded tape (this tape is to become a retroaαively indexed tape) into the VCR 1 and rewinds die tape to the beginning of die tape (BOT) (step 9220). The user then presses the index button on die remote controller 75 or 1300 and selects retro-indexing from the menu display on die screen 50a (step 9221). Alternatively, the remote controller 1300 may have a retroaαively indexed button. Upon diat seleαion, die microprocessor controller 31 then writes a TID and an absolute address on the control track 42C (step 9222). The ΗD is randomly created in the manner described above in FIG. 24. The microprocessor controller 31 then displays on die display 50a a prompt to die user to enter die tide of die first program or show on the tape and to press die ENTER button on the remote controller 1300 or alternatively to push ' button X to indicate diat it is at the end of die tape (EOT) (step 9223). Button X may be any button on the remote controller 1300 that is not used for entering a tide, for example the VCR Plus+ n button. Alternatively, the tide of programs may be entered after all programs have been numbered. If d e ENTER button has been pushed (step 9224), the microprocessor controller 31 then prompts the user on die video display 50 to fast forward (FF) the tape to the beginning of the next program and push button X (step 9226). The microprocessor controller 31 using die monitored signals from die tape movement sensor 22 and processed by die position logic and counter circuit 9 to calculate the tape distance traveled measured by counting die control track pulses and take-up spool spindle counts as described below (step 9227). Tape distance measuring methods are described below. The microprocessor controller 31 then repeats the process of writing the TID and die address on die control track 42C at step 9222 and prompts the user to enter the tide of die show at step 9223. At subsequent passes through step 9222, the address now written on the control track 42C is the address calculated from the tape distance that has been traveled during die fast forward to die program at step 9227. When button X has been pushed to indicate the end of tape (step 9228), the microprocessor controller 31 stores all the tides entered by die user at step 9223 into the RAM 33 in a memory location corresponding to the tape identification number (step 9229). The microprocessor controller 31 also displays die tape number to die user at step 9229 so diat when die user ejects the tape he may write the tape number onto die cassette housing (step 9231). The tape has now been retroaαively indexed so diat die control track 42C contains d e TID and address information and the direαory information is stored in die RAM 33 of the VCR 1. The operation of the VCR when an RI tape is inserted therein is described below in conneαion wid FIG. 33. In an alternate embodiment to FIG. 32, at step 9222, the microprocessor controller 31 writes a VISS mark on the control track of the tape. In addition, a program number, such as 1 for die first program, 2 for the second program, and so forth, and a ΗD number are also written on the control track. The VISS marks are used for addressing when die tape is later played in die VCR. When die tape is inserted into the indexing VCR 10, die VCR reads die TID from the control track 42c. The microprocessor controller 31 then reads die direαory associated widi the tape from the RAM 33. Now knowing that the tape is a retroaαively indexed tape, the microprocessor controller 31 searches the control track 42c for the VISS mark. In embodiments where die TID is stored in die VBI for PR and HR tapes, when the RI tape is inserted into d e VCR, die microprocessor controller 31 tries to read a TID from the VBI. After failing to find a TID in die VBI, die microprocessor controller 31 knows the tape is not a PR or a HR tape, and searches the control track for a VISS mark. When a VISS mark is found, die microprocessor controller 31 reads die TTD recorded widi die VISS mark and dien retrieves the associated direαory from the RAM 33. Alternate Embodiment for Retroaαivelv indexing An Old Tape In an alternate embodiment to FIG. 32 for indexing VCRs using die VISS+TP addressing system, at step 9222 the microprocessor controller 31 writes a VISS mark on the control track 42c of the tape. The microprocessor controller 31 also generates a program number as described above in conjunction widi FIG. 28. The microprocessor controller 31 prompts the user to enter the tide of die show and to fast forward to die next program as shown in steps 9223, 9224, 9226, and 9228. In a system without absolute addressing, step 9227 is not performed. However, in systems with absolute addressing (VISS+TP+AA), the microprocessor controller 31 calculates an absolute address at step 9227. After the user has indicated diat die last program has been entered at step 9229, die microprocessor controller 31 stores all tides, program numbers and the ejeαion program number into die RAM 33 and provides die user with a tape number for marking d e cassette housing. When this tape is later inserted into die indexing VCR 10, die microprocessor controller 31 attempts to find a TID in the VBI and when it is unable to find it, it displays a prompt to the user to enter die tape number. From this tape number, the microprocessor controller 31 reconstructs the TTD and recovers the direαory as well as die ejeαion program number from the RAM 33. Using the ejeαion program number as the current program number, the indexing VCR 10 is able to perform die indexing funαions. If the tape has been played in a non-indexing VCR since being indexed, d e ejeαion program number will be different than the tape program number. In systems with absolute addresses, d e indexing VCR 10 is able to recalculate its program number by using die dαeαed address to dαermine its location from the directory, using die recalibration method described below in conjunαion widi FIGs. 34a-34b. Operation of Identifying Tape and Recovering Direαory FIGS. 33a-33b are flow charts showing the steps employed in die operation of die indexing VCR using a FMAS addressing system when a tape is inserted dierein. When a tape is inserted into the VCR (step 9240), the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR control logic circuit 21 to play the tape for N seconds and read die control track for the TTD and an address (step 9241: this step is referred to as step [A] in subsequent steps of FIGS. 33a-33b). N is preferably between 3 to 5 seconds. After reading a TTD and an address from the tape, the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR control logic circuit 21 to stop die playing of die tape (step 9242). The microprocessor controller 31 waits until die INDEX button on the remote controller is pressed (step 9243). When die INDEX button is pressed, if a TTD and an address were read at step 9241 (step 9244), die microprocessor controller 31 dαermines from die TTD whether the tape is a (1) home recorded tape (HR), a (2) prerecorded tape (PR), or a (3) home recorded (HR) loaner (step 9246). If at step 9246 the tape is a HR tape (step 9247), the microprocessor controller 31 recovers the direαory 33a corresponding to the tape with diat TTD from the RAM 33 (step 9248). The microprocessor controller 31 then displays die recovered directory on the video display 58a (step 9249) and dien enters a ready mode (step 9251). The ready mode is a mode in which die microprocessor controller 31 knows the current address and die ΗD. If at step 9246 it is dαermined that the tape is a prerecorded tape (step 9252), the microprocessor controller 31 reads die directory to dαermine if die TTD is stored in die RAM 33 (step 9253). If it is in the RAM 33, die microprocessor controller 31 recovers the directory from RAM 33 as described above in step 9248. On the other hand, if the ΗD is not in the RAM 33, die microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR control logic circuit 21 to play die tape so that die microprocessor controller 31 can read die directory from the VBI on die tape (step 9254) and dien displays d e read directory on die sαeen at step 9249. On the other hand, if die tape is dαermined to be a home recorded loaner tape (an HR tape that is indexed on a first indexing VCR that is played in a second indexed VCR diat is not interconneαed to the first VCR) at step 9246 (step 9256) the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR to fast forward (FF) to the end of tape (EOT) (step 9257) to read die directory from die VBI at step 9254. However, if at step 9244 the VCR had not read a TTD and address at step 9241, and referring now to FIG. 33b, die microprocessor controller 31 determines whetiier video was dαeαed at step 9241 (step 9258). If no video was detected, die microprocessor controller 31 displays on die screen a query as to whether the tape is a blank tape, (BT), a non-indexed tape (NI), or a retroaαively indexed tape (RI) (step 9259). If at step 9259 the tape is a blank tape, the microprocessor controller 31 commands the VCR control logic circuit 21 to rewind the tape to the beginning of tape (BOT) (step 9261) and display on die screen 50a a question asking the user to enter the length of die tape (step 9262). Alternatively, die microprocessor controller 31 may automatically dαermine d e length of die tape using one of die lengdi dαermination methods described below. The microprocessor controller 31 generates a new tape identification number for the blank tape in a manner described above in FIG. 23 and displays an index screen with d e assigned TTD (step 9263). The microprocessor controller 31 then enters a ready mode (step 9264). On the odier hand, if at step 9259 die tape is a non-indexed tape, the microprocessor controller 31 displays on die screen 50a die question "Do you want to re-index?" (step 9266). If the user answers yes (Step 9267), the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR to rewind the tape to the beginning of the tape and start re-indexing die tape as described above in FIG. 32. (Step 9268) If, however, the user does not want to re-index the tape, (Step 9267) the microprocessor controller 31 removes the screen and commands the VCR control logic circuit 21 to display die TV picture read from the videotape. (Step 9269) If, however, the tape is a retroactively indexed tape at step 9259, the microprocessor controller 31 commands the VCR to rewind d e tape and search for a TTD mark on e control track. (Step 9271) The rewind and search continues until an address and TTD are deteαed (Step 9272). The microprocessor controller 31 then searches the RAM 33 for a program with die dαeαed TTD, and if d e microprocessor controller finds die TTD in d e RAM 33. (Step 9273), the controller 31 recovers the directory of the tapes associated widi the TTD on the RAM 33 (Step 9274) and displays die recovered directory on die screen 50a (Step 9276). On die odier hand, if die microprocessor controller 31 does not find die TID in the RAM (Step 9273), it commands die VCR to fast forward to the end of tape (Step 9277) to read the direαory from die VBI. (Step 9278) The read directory is d en displayed on die screen at step 9276. If video is dαeαed at step 9241, the microprocessor controller 31 proceeds from step 9258 described above, to command die VCR to rewind the tape and look for a T D mark on the control track 42c (Step 9279) If the beginning of the tape is reached (Step 9281), die microprocessor controller 31 proceeds to treat the tape as a non-indexed tape at step 9266 described above. However, if die beginning of the tape has not been reached die VCR continues to rewind until an address mark and TTD is dαeαed in the control track 42c (Step 9282) and die microprocessor controller 31 dαermines whether to recover the directory from the RAM 33 or the VBI at step 9273 described above. FIGS. 34a-34b are flow charts showing the steps employed in die operation of the indexing VCR, using die VISS PLUS TP addressing system, when a tape is inserted dierein. Like steps to FIGs. 33a-33b have like numbers. When a tape is inserted into the VCR (step 9240), the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR control logic circuit 21 to play die tape for N seconds and read die VBI for a T D and program number (step 9241': is step is referred to as step [A] in subsequent steps of FIGS. 34a-34b). The time N is preferably between 2 to 5 seconds. In an indexing VCR using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system and an absolute addressing system, die VCR also dαermines the absolute address. After reading a TTD and program number from die tape, the indexing VCR 10 stops playing the tape (step 9242). After waiting for the INDEX button on die remote controller to be pressed (step 9243), if a TTD and a program number were read at step 9241', d e microprocessor controller 31 dαermines from the TTD whedier the tape is a home recorded tape (HR) or a prerecorded tape (PR)(step 9246'). The microprocessor controller 31 then operates as in FIGs. 33a-33b as described above for steps 9247 through 9254. On the other hand, if at step 9244' the indexing VCR 10 had not read a TTD and program number at step 9241', and referring now to FIG. 34b, die microprocessor controller 31 displays on die screen a query as to whether die tape is a blank tape, (BT), a non-indexed tape (NT), or a retroaαively indexed tape (RI) (step 9259). If at step 9259 the tape is a blank tape, die microprocessor controller 31 operates as in FIGs. 33a-33b as described above for steps 9261 through 9264. On the other hand, if at step 9259 the tape is a non-indexed tape, the microprocessor controller 31 operates as in FIGs. 33a-33b as described above for steps 9266 through 9269. If, however, die tape is a retroaαively indexed tape at step 9259, the microprocessor controller 31 displays on die screen 50a a prompt to the user to enter the tape number of the inserted tape (step 9271'). From this number, the microprocessor controller 31 reconstructs die TTD of die tape (step 9273') and recovers from the RAM 33 the directory of die tape associated widi die TTD (Step 9274') and displays die recovered directory on die screen 50a (Step 9276). When a RI tape is inserted into die VCR, the program number calculated from the ejection program number may be verified and recalibrated in an indexing VCR having an absolute addressing system. At step 9241 ', the indexing VCR calculates die absolute address using one of die methods described below in conjunαion widi FIGs. 3841. At step 9274' after recovering die directory, die microprocessor controller 31 determines the program number related to die measured absolute address. If die tape has been played in a non-indexing VCR or in an indexing VCR diat is not coupled to the user's VCR, die ejeαion program number will differ from the calculated program number. The VCR dien recalibrates itself by using die calculated program number instead of the ejeαion program number. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the search for a program on an indexed tape using a FMAS addressing system. The microprocessor controller 31 is in a ready mode by knowing the current address of die tape and die destination address of a user seleαed program entry from the directory. (Step 9290) The microprocessor controller 31 first enters a fast search stage. The microprocessor controller 31 loads into a count down counter the value of die number of control track pulses between the current position and die destination position (N) subtraαed from the number of counts before die destination (n) (Step 9291). Based on die direαion to die destination address, d e microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR to eidier fast forward or rewind die tape (step 9292), and during the fast forward or rewind, monitors the read control track pulses and counts down from the N value loaded at step 9291 (Step 9293). The fast forward or rewind continues until die count is not greater than zero. (Step 9294) The microprocessor controller 31 now enters a soft landing stage in which the VCR is commanded to play and search for d e address marks on the control track. (Step 9296) This search continues until an address mark is dαeαed. (Step 9297) Upon detection, die microprocessor controller 31 enters a confirmation stage. The address mark is read (Step 9298) and if die read address does not equal the address of die destination (Step 9299) die microprocessor controller 31 loads a new count into die countdown counter at step 9291 described above. Otherwise, when d e address equals the address of die destination, die tape is at the requested location and the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR to stop (Step 9301). The addressing system used in FIG. 35 may use any of die location determination methods described below, such as counting the number of control track pulses between the current address and die destination address or counting the take-up spool spindle revolution counts. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the search for a program on an indexed tape using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system. The microprocessor controller 31 is in a ready mode by knowing die current program number (n in FIG. 36) of die tape and d e destination program number (N in FIG. 36) of a user selected program entry from the directory. (Step 9290'). The microprocessor controller 31 loads into a count down counter die value of die number of VISS marks between the current position and die destination position (N-n)(Step 9291'). Based on die direαion to the destination address, die microprocessor controller 31 commands the VCR to either fast forward or rewind die tape (step 9292'), and during d e fast forward or rewind, monitors the read VISS marks on the control track 42c (Step 9393') and counts down from the N-n value loaded at step 9291' (Step 9293"). The fast forward or rewind continues until die count equals zero. (Step 9294'). The VCR dien stops (Step 9301'). FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die search for a program on an indexed tape using a VISS PLUS TP addressing system and an absolute addressing system. As in FIG. 36, me microprocessor controller 31 is in a ready mode by knowing the current program number (n in FIG. 37) of the tape and die destination program number (N in FIG. 37) of a user seleαed program entry from the directory. (Step 3700). The microprocessor controller 31 first enters a fast search stage. The microprocessor controller reads die absolute address of die destination program from die RAM 33 (Step 3701). Based on die direαion to the destination address, the microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR to eidier fast forward or rewind die tape (step 3702), and during die fast forward or rewind, monitors, using the absolute addressing system, monitors the address of die tape (Step 3703). By using an absolute address system such as die reel ratio system, d e fast search can be conduαed at high speed. The fast forward 1 or rewind continues until die present address equals to die destination address. (Step 3704) The microprocessor controller 31 now enters a soft landing stage in which the VCR is commanded to a search speed (Step 3706) and searches for the VISS marks on the control track 42c (Step 3707). Upon dαeαion of die VISS mark (Step 3708), the VCR confirms the program number by reading die VBI (Step 3708) and when die program number equals die destination program, the VCR stops (Step 3710). Otherwise, die VCR reenters the first search at step 3702. LOCATION DETERMINATION FIG. 38 is a schematic view of a system for determining the absolute program location of videotape widiout using address marks. To a degree of accuracy, die absolute position of die tape can be dαermined by measuring me amount of tape wound on eidier of the cassette reels 40b, 40C for the embodiment shown in FIG. 38. Two automatic methods are proposed for accomplishing the tape position measurement which do not require any additional hardware calibration or index marks over that currendy found in conventional VCR's at is easy to implement in a VCR or a stand alone re winder. As background, die amount of tape on a cassette spool is related to die diamαer of the tape wound diereon. Errors occur in this relationship which are a funαion of the tape tension during fast forward and rewind which introduce a "zone of uncertainty" (ZOU) as to the absolute location. However, in some of the embodiments, die error is within acceptable limits. A first method is now described for measuring die location on die tape. The diamαer (Dl) of the tape on a spool can be indirectly measured by measuring die length of tape (X) wound onto the spool for a given angular rotation (θl) of die spool or measuring the angular rotation θl for a given tape length. In odier words, X is approximately equal to Dl x θl/2. For previously recorded tapes, the control track sync pulses represent a convenient and accurate measure of tape length and can be dαeαed by die control track head in any mode such as fast forward, rewind or play. By way of background, measurement of spool angular rotations presendy accomplish the VCR's for purposes of driving a front panel index counter. Methods of diese measurements include magnetic pulses and optical pulses where for example, eight pulses represent one spool revolution. In an alternate embodiment, greater angular resolution may be obtained by an optical system that includes a reflected light photo optical detector 9311 and a disc attached to die VCR spindle which has a plurality of reflective lines 9310 printed or ached thereon. In a typical embodiment, tiiere are hundreds of reflective lines 9310. High resolution angular rotation measurement is achieved by counting reflective light pulses during spool rotation. Tape length is then accurately measured by counting sync pulses using die existing control track head. Having described die method, d e details of die system operation are described for a VCR widi die address capability built therein. When a program is first recorded on d e tape, the system in the record mode counts the number of reflective lines and thus angular rotation on the take-up spool for a given number of sync pulses which are being recorded. The microprocessor controller 31 stores this number in die directory for this program as the "start" absolute location. The system continues to monitor and store in a scratch pad location of d e RAM 33, the angular pulses and group of sync pulses during recording. When die stop mode is initiated, die last angular rotation data in the scratch pad memory is also stored in the program directory as die "end" absolute location. Thus die directory for each program has stored in it data which brackets the absolute location range for that program. Alternatively, the number of sync pulses written for a given number of refleαive lines may be stored. Wid die directory now created, when the recorded tape is reinserted into die machine for a second play, d e play mode is aαivated for typically less than one second and die angular rotation/sync pulse data is read by counting die sync pulses and die refleαive lines and comparing it with d e absolute location range data stored, eidier on die control track or in the RAM 33, in the directory for all the programs on die tape. From this comparison, a dαermination can be made as to which program is at die present tape location. It should be noted that, although the recording tape speed (e.g. EP, SP, SLP) effects the linear spacing along the tape between sync pulses, die VCR automatically plays die tape at die same speed as it was recorded so d at tape speed is not a problem. As noted above, there is a zone of uncertainty in positioning the tape as a result of tape tension variations. Because the absolute end number and start number stored in die directory are essentially d e same for concurrendy recorded programs, if the tape is positioned exactiy at the start of the program, the system cannot accurately dαermine if it just passed or just before d e start of this program. In these cases, if it is deteαed that the present location is within the zone of uncertainty of die stored start/end location, the system rewinds die tape, for preferably less than one second, and now knows without any ambiguity at it is in the previous program. Once this information is known the system can fast forward or rewind to die user selected programs simply by counting a bookmark which is a VISS type mark placed on die control track to mark the starting point of each recorded program. This system no longer has a need to encode a program number into die bookmark. This first method is now described widi respeα to a stand alone rewind er. When the user is creating the directory by manually locating in his VCR the start of each program, then transferring the tape to the rewinder. The rewinder first goes into die fast forward mode, rewind or play modes and collects the angular rotation/sync pulse data using die refleαive disc and d e control track head and stores this information in the RAM 33 for each program in a manner similar to that described above. This data is used during playback as above to locate the present position of the tape. Note however, that for this implementation to work for programs recorded at different recording speeds, die rewinder must have the ability to dαeα die recording speed which dien is used to calculate a new location. In an alternate embodiment, die second automatic method is described. As an overview of this mediod, die absolute location of the tape is found by measuring die diameter of tape on each of the two spools Dl, D2 and using die ratio of diese measurements to approximate the absolute tape location. This method eliminates d e need for linear tape measurements using sync pulses, and hence can be used to dαermine absolute tape position, even if the tape location has never been recorded upon the tape (because no recording has been done, diere are no sync pulses to be counted). The ratio of d e spool diamαers (D 1 /D2) is proportional to the ratio of angular displacement of die spools, (Θ1/Θ2) with errors introduced by uneven tape tensioning. By incorporating a refleαive disk and a reflective light sensor 9311, each of die two spindles d e relative displacements of each being measured in a ratio dαermined using suitable software. The use of tiiis method for a built-in VCR is now described. When a program is first recorded on die tape, the system in the record mode, fast forward or rewind mode counts the number of refleαive lines 9310 (angular rotation) on die take-up and unwind spools for a given number of refleαed pulses. The microprocessor controller 31 stores these numbers or the ratio in the directory for tiiis program as the start absolute location. The system continues to monitor and store a scratch pad memory, the angular pulses/ratio during recording. When die stop mode is aαivated, die last angular rotation data in die scratch pad memory is also stored in the program directory as die "end" absolute location. The directory now has for each program stored in it, data which brackets the absolute location range for that program. To resolve the zone of uncertainty caused by die tape tension variations, method 2 can also use die rewind to die previous program method described above for method 1. Mediod 2 is applied to a stand alone rewinder in a similar manner to at described above for method 1. FIG. 39 shows an alternate embodiment for determining tape length. This embodiment is based on die assumption at a measurement of die full spool diameter of tape is sufficient to unambiguously dαermine die tape length. In diis embodiment no mechanical components need to be added to a conventional VCR. As described above, die diamαer D2 tape on a spool can be indirectiy measured by measuring a length of tape X wound onto die spool for given angular rotation Θ2 of the spool or measuring the angular rotation 62 for a given tape length X, because X is approximately equal to D2 x θ2/2. When the VCR is in die play mode, die linear movement of the tape as a funαion of time is accurately controlled. Thus die amount of tape X wound onto or off of the spool in die play mode can be accurately measured by measuring time. The angular rotation of at least one tape spool is already measured using eidier a magnetic or optical system as desαibed above. In measuring the time it tapes for a full spool (fully rewound tape) to rotate a specific number of degrees, for example, one or two revolutions in the play mode, die fu l spool tape diamαer is determined and from die relationship noted above, the tape length is also dαermined. By starting a timer, when the rotation sensor generates a first pulse, and stopping die timer after the sensor has generated a pre-dαermined number of pulses corresponding to a known angle of rotation. The elapsed time is proportional to the tape length. In an alternate embodiment, e tape length can be measured at odier dian d e fully rewound position by measuring die diameter of tape on each of the two tape spools. In this embodiment, each spool has angular rotation sensors. Two timers can be used, each start and stop by angular sensor pulses and die two spools while in die play mode comparing the two elapsed time yields data on d e tape diameters for both spools. By using a look up table, the tape length of any point along the tape can be dαermined widiout rewind. FIG. 40 is a schematic view of an alternate embodiment for the tape movement sensor. In the embodiments of FIGs. 38-39, the address is determined by eidier counting sync pulses on the control track 42c or counting spindle rotation. However, the accuracy of diese systems depends on uncontrolled variables such as tape winding tension, which is related to die start, stop, play, rewind and fast forward history of die tape. The embodiment of FIG. 40 dαermines tape position by measuring linear tape travel during play, record, fast forward, and rewind. A tape movement sensor 22' has a fixed roller 9302 in contaα widi one side of die tape 42. The fixed roller 9302 has a plurality of refleαive lines 9306 that refleα light from a revolution counter 9303 that counts the number of dαeαed pulses refleαed from the fixed roller 9302 as the tape is advanced. A biasing roller 9301 is mounted to a first end of a spring 9304 whose second end is mounted to a frame 9305. The biasing roller 9301 is in spring biased contaα with die odier side of the tape 42 so that the movement of the tape between die biasing roller 9301 and die fixed roller 9302 causes both rollers to rotate. The revolution counter 9303 counts die number of refleαed pulses and provides this count to die position logic and counter circuit 9 which communicates the count dirough die VCR control logic circuit 21 to die microprocessor controller 31. The microprocessor controller 31 then converts the angular rotation pulse count into distance travelled by d e distance traveled = diamαer of roller X pulse count X angular spacing between pulses. This distance travelled is dien used as an address for die location of the tape. FIG. 41 is a schematic view of an anodier alternate embodiment dαermining the location on d e tape using a tape movement sensor in conjunction widi a spindle revolution counter. A tape movement sensor 22" is similar to the tape sensor 22' in FIG. 40, except the tape movement sensor 22" contains a linear position sensor 9307 which detects the distance between die biasing roller 9301 and e fixed roller 9302. When die tape 42 contacts both rollers, die distance between the rollers is the tiiickness of the tape 42. A revolution counter 9311 counts the number of pulses refleαed from a plurality of refleαive lines 9310 on d e tape reel 40b in a manner similar to that described above for the revolution counter 9303. In a manner similar to that described above in FIG. 39, wid the tape fully rewound, die tape diameter is measured by measuring the linear motion/angular ratio as indicated by d e two revolution counters 9303, 9311. Given die full reel tape diamαer and die measured tape thickness, the overall tape length can be dαermined. In anodier embodiment to those described above, die ΗD may be entered manually eidier in addition to or in lieu of recording die TTD on die tape. Title ownloa in Program tides are broadcasted by TV stations on line 21 field 2 of the VBI. These are decoded and inserted into the directory. For programs widiout program tide information, a channel-date-time stamp is inserted automatically. Playing Indexed Tape in Non-Interconnected VCRs To play using indexing funαions an indexed tape in a second VCR where die original directory information resides in a RAM of a first VCR requires the transfers of die directory. The directory is first downloaded onto d e tape in die first VCR. The second VCR dien reads die downloaded direαory from the tape in order to utilize die indexing capability. If die tape is changed by recording additional programs or erasing existing programs, a new directory must be created on die tape if the tape is to be played in die first VCR or in yet another VCR. FIGs. 42a-42b are flow charts showing the steps employed in d e operation of transferring a directory along widi the tape to a second VCR diat is not conneαed to d e first VCR. Referring specifically to FIG. 42a, the user inserts the tape 40 into the VCR 1 (step 8100). The VCR reads die identification code from the tape (step 8102) and retrieves the corresponding directory from die RAM 33 (step 8104). Because die user intends to give or lend die tape 40 to a second user for use in a second indexing VCR when die user presses die record and index keys on his remote controller (step 8106), the VCR 1 initiates a routine to write at a predetermined location, such as die end of the tape, the direαory from the RAM 33 onto the tape 42. The microprocessor controller 31 commands die VCR 1 to advance die tape 42 to the physical end of die tape (step 8108). Upon reaching the end of die tape, the microprocessor controller 31 writes the directory onto die VBI of d e tape 42 in the format of a prerecorded tape (step 8110). The user removes the tape from his VCR and provides die tape to the second user who inserts the tape 40 into a second VCR 1 (step 8112). When d e user wants to operate in the indexing mode, he presses die index key on his remote controller (step 8114) and die second VCR 1 reads the directory from the VBI and stores the directory in temporary RAM (8116). Because the machine id in die tape identification is different, d e second VCR knows that the tape has been indexed in another VCR. The VCR asks the user to enter die tape number. If the user enters a zero, the VCR knows the tape is a loaner tape and advances to d e end of d e tape and reads die directory. Referring now to FIG. 42b, die second user may store the directory in permanent memory by pressing the enter key on the remote controller (step 8118). In response to the enter command, die microprocessor controller 31 of the second VCR 1 stores the directory in permanent RAM 33 (8120). When the second user has finished playing die tape and wishes to remove it, he presses the ejeα button on die VCR (step 8122). The microprocessor controller 31 dαermines whether die tape, and consequendy die directory, has changed (step 8124). If it has not changed, the VCR ejects the tape (step 8126). On the odier hand, if die directory has been changed at step 8124, the microprocessor controller 31 displays on d e display 50 "updating directory on tape" (step 8126). The microprocessor controller 31 advances d e tape to the physical end of the tape (step 8128) and writes die directory on the VBI (step 8130). The VCR dien ejects die tape (step 8126). In an alternate embodiment, when the user ejects the tape from the second VCR, steps 8124 through step 8130 may be performed only if the user requests the recording of die directory in a manner similar to that described above in step 8106 of FIG. 42a. In yα anodier alternate embodiment, die second user may be warned not to record on die loaner tape. Auxiliary Information Display Referring back to FIG. 1, as described above, by using die VBI decoder and d e RAM 33, the indexing VCR 10 can capture data broadcasted on die VBI and display it eidier concurrentiy widi or at a later time to the data transmission. The broadcasted data may be transmitted on a plurality of lines of die VBI including line 21. Per the E.I.A. specifications, Extended Data Services provide for pointers on line 21 (supplemental data location) to point to lines other than line 21. By using data on diese odier lines in the same format as data on line 21, die VBI decoder 60a can decode die odier line data. The auxiliary information is preferably broadcasted in a 35 charaαers X 15 rows format to match the display 50a (see FIG. 1) format. In the preferred embodiment, three types of auxiliary information data are transmitted: program identification (program ID or PID), channel specific program guide (CSPG) and program related information (PRI). The viewer is alerted to the existence of die auxiliary information in several ways. In a first mediod, before die program is transmitted, die indexing VCR 10 displays on die screen a prompt to the user diat d e information is forthcoming. The prompt may be a flashing icon, such as the letter "i," or a new screen, such as a blue background with white text. The indexing VCR 10 requests die user to enter a command, for example by pressing the "i" button, to store in the RAM 33 the auxiliary information, or in some embodiments, to record in die record stack the "PLUSCODE™" number corresponding to die program that is to be recorded. As will be described below, die user may later recall this information. To indicate diat die command was received, die indexing VCR 10 may either stop flashing die icon display, display an acknowledgement, such as "stored" or "saved," or display separate screen. The user may request die information before, during, or after die broadcast. Alternatively, die auxiliary information may be transmitted and stored in a temporary buffer in die RAM 33 before the viewer is prompted to enter a command. In this embodiment, the indexing VCR 10 transfers the auxiliary information from the temporary buffer to a permanent buffer in response to die user's commands. Alternatively, in a second method, the indexing VCR 10 may provide d e prompt after d e program is viewed. In mis embodiment, die auxiliary information may be transmitted before the program, during die program, or after the prompt. In a tiiird method, die prompt is displayed concurrentiy with d e program. For each method, the user has a predetermined amount of time after die prompt to request d e auxiliary information. When the auxiliary information is requested, d e indexing VCR 10 displays it for either a predetermined time, until die user cancels it (for example, by pressing the program ID button a second time), until die next auxiliary information is requested, or until die broadcaster transmits a cancel command in the VBI. Because the auxiliary information is normally used for advertising, it is desirable to not alert die user to stop recording a program when a commercial occurs. Thus, die time that d e auxiliary information is transmitted is preferably adjusted so d at die user cannot generate in response to the auxiliary information a signal for shutting off the VCR. For example, if the auxiliary information is always transmitted 30 seconds before the commercial (i.e. 30 seconds is always die lead time), the user may program his VCR to stop recording 30 seconds after the dαeαion of d e auxiliary information and start recording again 60 seconds after die VCR stops recording. But if, die lead time is variable, the user misses recording a portion of the program. For example, if die next commercial uses a 60 second lead time, the viewer shuts off the VCR 30 seconds early if the user is using a 30 second lead time. Furthermore, the auxiliary information may also be transmitted after die commercial so that die viewer cannot shut off die VCR in advance. Alternatively, die prompt may be a number diat die user enters to indicate which group of auxiliary information is to be recorded. Describing the program ID first, die broadcast station preferably broadcasts die program identification information on line 21, field 2 of die VBI according to EIA specifications. This information may include: Tide of program Program lengdi in minutes Today's day and date (when viewing TV broadcasts) or day and date of recording (when viewing taped shows) Station call letters (e.g. KCET or KCAL) or 4-letter abbreviation of station name (e.g. SHOW for Showtime) Channel number In a preferred mode of operation, when die user changes the channel or when recording or playback of a tape begins, the program ID is automatically displayed for a predαermined length of time, e.g., five seconds, and dien disappears. Alternatively, when the user presses a program ID button on d e remote controller, the indexing VCR 10 displays die program ID. When a program is recorded, die program tide is stored in the directory and also inserted in die VBI portion of die recorded program. A viewer can access the tide of die program being shown by pressing the "Program ID" key. When die key is pressed, die microprocessor controller 31 sets the VBI decoder to decode seleαed field and lines of the VBI either from the broadcasted signals or from the reproduced signals depending upon its mode of operation. The program I.D. information for a plurality of viewed channels is stored in the RAM 33. Although some of die program I.D. information changes with die program (e.g., program tide, start time, lengdi, program category), this information is quickly retrievable from the memory when the user switches channels and requests the program I.D. to be displayed. Using die start time and lengdi of d e program, d e indexing VCR 10 checks, periodically or in response to a Program I.D. command, whether the information is still within die valid time before displaying it on screen. The channel specific program guide is die combination of the program IDs for a plurality of programs at will be broadcasted in an upcoming predαermined time. In addition to the information included in me program ID, die channel specific program guide may also include die start times, the tides, the "PLUSCODE™" numbers and a description of die programs. In addition, d e information mat is displayed may be controlled by attribute codes, which are described below in conjunαion widi FIG. 55 contained widiin the program guide. For example, the "PLUSCODE™" numbers may be printable on screen, but if it is preceded by a "non-print" attribute, the indexing VCR 10 does not display it. As a second example, special events may be highlighted by using a charaαer attribute. A broadcasting station broadcasts on a periodic basis, die channel specific program guide in die VBI of die broadcast. The VBI decoder in die indexing VCR 10 continuously decodes die channel specific program guide from the VBI and stores it in the RAM 33. Because of unexpeαed events, such as sport programs that overrun tiieir scheduled broadcast time or news breaks that shift programs, the broadcaster may update die program guide and transmit the new guide. Accordingly, as d e new guide is read, the indexing VCR 10 stores it in die RAM 33. The program guide may also include a video program guide of special programs such as video magazines, video sales catalogs, video classified ads, and infomercials. The program guide allows die user access to a television program listing for those who do not have a periodical listing or newspaper listing, or tiiose who misplaced tiieir listings. The format of the channel specific program guide data packα is described below in conjunαion widi FIG. 55. As die data is decoded, die data stored in the RAM 33 is updated by each subsequent CSPG data packα. The quantity of information supplied in die CSPG data packα is dαermined by die broadcaster. For example, the broadcaster may provide program schedules for the subsequent eight hours but provide only die description of die programs for the first two hours. In addition, d e guide may also include special events for the upcoming few days. By viewing the listing before the viewer goes to work or goes to sleep, the user may program his indexing VCR 10 using die program guide for recording shows during his absence or sleep. When die viewer switches to a different channel, die indexing VCR 10 will begin reading and storing the CSPG data for die new channel. However, because many viewers switch between channels, sufficient memory may be provided so diat die program guides for at least two channels may be stored in die RAM 33. The stored program guide may be used to implement timer programming of the VCR. The user programs the indexing VCR 10 to record die desired program by moving the cursor to this program pressing die Record button. In embodiments in which die "PLUSCODE™" numbers are displayed on the screen, die viewer may also program the indexing VCR 10 by entering on die remote controller die "PLUSCODE™" number for the program he would like to record. In response thereto, the indexing VCR 10 stores die "PLUSCODE™" number into its programming stack for execution as described above. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die processing of program related information. Program related information (PRI) is information broadcasted in die VBI diat is related to a program being aired which is available upon user command eidier concurrentiy with die program or at a later time. The use of PRI extends d e time of an advertisement because die viewer is able to view die information at a later time at a pace seleαed by die viewer. Examples of PRI include statistics of baseball players during a baseball game, recipes given out during a cooking lesson, and problem assignments and answers after an educational program. In other examples, many commercials have a message during die program urging the viewer to call a toll free number to gα further information or to place an order or giving details about an upcoming sales event or promotion. Under existing systems, such information which is conveyed in die video is fleeting because most viewers are either not disposed to take any aαion on the spur of the moment or are unprepared to take such aαion. The information transmitted as part of the PRI in die VBI may be captured and displayed on screen at die command of the user. Thus, the information may repeat the information provided during die commercial or program or may contain additional information. For example, the commercial may be a promotion about an upcoming movie while the PRI for this commercial may provide additional details of die cast or plot of the movie. Further, a "PLUSCODE™" number may be provided so diat at die press of a single button the "PLUSCODE™" number is used to program the indexing VCR 10 to record die requested program. Alternatively, me commercial may be a short commercial which is a promotion for a long commercial such as an infomercial aired in die middle of die night. In yα anodier embodiment, die PRI may be an electronic coupon that is outputted dirough die serial data link to a printer or other devices to print or store the coupon which may then be later redeemed at participating retailers or stores for the promoted discounts. In another embodiment, a prerecorded tape may have a PRI recorded diereon. Referring now in particular to FIG. 43, die broadcast station broadcasts die PRI in a time window during which it is related to die program or commercial being broadcasted. Alternatively, the PRI may be broadcast offsα in time from the program or commercial. The PRI is typically repeated throughout the time window. For example, the PRI for a 30 second commercial is broadcasted during die commercial. For a PRI message that is 8 seconds long, die PRI is transmitted four times wherein the first tiiree times are the complαe PRI and die fourth time is an incomplete message. The PRI is preferably sent on one or more VBI lines referenced by pointers on line 21, field 2, as described below. The indexing VCR 10 continuously reads die VBI for die PRIs (Step 3715). Each PRI has a ID number so that die indexing VCR 10 may recognize when die PRI is repeated during a commercial or in a rerun of die commercial. When d e ID number of the present PRI equals die ID number of a PRI in either the temporary or the storage buffers (Step 3716), the indexing VCR 10 overwrites the old PRI in die buffer (Step 3717). Otherwise, if there is not a match of ID numbers, the indexing VCR 10 determines whether die temporary buffer is full (Step 3718). If it is full, it overwrites previously stored PRIs on a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis (Step 3719). Otherwise, die indexing VCR 10 stores the new PRI in die temporary buffer (Step 3720). In addition to monitoring die VBI for detected PRIs, die indexing VCR 10 also monitors for user seleαed commands. If a store command is detected (Step 3721), the indexing VCR 10 determines whether a storage enable bit is sα (Step 3722), which if it is not sα during die broadcast dien die PRI is not storable (i.e., the PRI can be stored only in the temporary buffer and not in the storage buffer). If the storage enable bit is sα, die indexing VCR 10 deletes die PRI from the temporary buffer and stores it in a storage buffer. The indexing VCR 10 men displays an acknowledgement message such as "stored" on die TV screen, if an acknowledgement bit is set (Step 3723). The indexing VCR 10 dien continues monitoring die PRI at step 3715. If, however, a store command has not been set or the storage enable bit is not sα, if a review command is not dαeαed (Step 3724) d e indexing VCR 10 returns to reading die PRI. Odierwise, the indexing VCR 10 displays die tides of die PRIs (die first line of the PRI) stored in die buffers in a display such as mat shown in FIG. 44 (Step 3725). The viewer is able to move through die displayed PRIs using the cursor keys on the remote controller (Step 3726). The PRI that is pointed to is highlighted by reverse video or by odier methods well known in the art. If a play command is sent (Step 3727), the indexing VCR 10 plays die PRI (Step 3728). If die PRI is being read from a recorded tape, the VCR enters a pause mode and suspends motion of die tape when die PRI is displayed. After the PRI is displayed, die VCR resumes playing die tape. When the PRI is displayed, die user must either store die PRI in die storage buffer, by pressing the store button (Steps 3729-3730), or delete die PRI from eidier temporary or storage buffer by pressing the erase button (Steps 3731-3732). By pressing die print button (Step 3733), die user can print the PRI (Step 3734). Printing may be done eidier to a printer or another device connected to die serial port by pressing the record or send button. As shown in FIG. 44, PRI B and PRI D are stored from earlier broadcasts. The PRIs E, F, G, H are from later broadcasts and are stored in die temporary buffer. At a later time when the user presses the Review button again, the PRIs E, F, G, H may be replaced by new PRIs, while PRIs B and D remain in the storage buffer. Alternatively, die displayed PRI, in FIG. 44 may be in a single list with a notation of which PRI's are stored. For PRIs diat contain "PLUSCODE™" numbers referring to odier related programs that are to be broadcasted later, when die user presses the second button (Step 3735) the indexing VCR 10 stores the "PLUSCODE™" number in its programming stack for subsequent recording (Step 3736). The indexing VCR 10 continues to display die buffer content until die user presses the exit key (Step 3737). The embodiment discussed above uses die STORE button and die REVIEW button for storing and reviewing PRIs. Alternatively, these functions may be done by a single button, such as die i button. Pressing the i button one time may invoke die storage function while pressing it twice in a row may invoke die review funαion. Video Publishing Through Broadcast As desαibed above, a PR tape has a directory recorded on the VBI throughout die tape. However, a single video program at is being broadcasted may similarly have a plurality of video segments mat are each separate video programs. For example, one airing of the television show "60 Minutes" typically has three news segments and one segment widi commentary by Andy Rooney. Odier examples include video magazines, video sales catalogs and video classified ads. Anodier example are video books such as karaoke or how to books, e.g. on exercise or cooking. The user normally wants to watch positions of the video magazine at later times. Under die standard recording method described above, the indexing VCR 10 reads only one program tide in the VBI of die broadcasted program, since die recording is in one continuous session. (The resultant recording will have a single constant program number in the TP packα on line 19. In addition, only one VISS mark is recorded which is at die beginning of die recording.) However, many users want each video segment to be indexed. Accordingly, extra control signals are broadcast to provide additional indexing to each individual section. A pointer, described below in conjunction widi FIG. 54, in line 21 points to a VBI line which contains a video magazine (VM) packα. The VM packα is broadcast in die VBI line at d e starting point of the second seαion and of each section thereafter. As described below in conjunction widi FIG. 56, d e VM packα contains the encrypted tide of die section. At die same time, the directory is broadcasted repeatedly on line 20 of die VBI. The format of the directory is identical to die format of directories for prerecorded tapes. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the operation of the indexing VCR 10 for video magazines. FIG. 45 is discussed in light of an illustrative example in which a tape has two regular programs and one video magazine, which is recorded after the two programs, on the tape. After the user presses die Record button, (Step 9602), the indexing VCR 10 reads die tide of die video magazine from the PRI (step 9604) and stores it in the RAM 33 (step 9606). (When recording is started, the indexing VCR 10 uses die existing TTD if die tape has one, or otherwise, the indexing VCR 10 creates a TTD if the tape is a blank tape.) In the illustrative example, the tide is stored as die tiiird program. The indexing VCR 10 monitors the VBI for VM packets (step 9608). Upon dαeαion of a VM packα in the VBI (step 9610), die microprocessor controller 31 sets the program category in the directory to indicate diat die program is a video magazine (step 9612). In an embodiment where a pointer is used to note die line on die VBI, upon deteαion of the pointer, die indexing VCR 10 monitors die designated line of die VBI for die occurrence of a VM packα. In response to receiving die VM packet, The microprocessor controller 31 writes a VISS mark on the control track 42c to identify die start of the next seαion (Step 9614). The microprocessor controller 31 then increments the previous program number by one (step 9616) and writes it as die program number in the TP packet on line 19 of die VBI (Step 9618). The indexing VCR 10 reads and decrypts die direαory from line 20 of die VBI of die broadcast signal and writes it onto the VBI of die tape (step 9620). For the illustrative example, if the tape is somewhere in a program, such as program 2, other than the video magazine when the user later inserts the tape, the directory will appear as: Program Length Cheers 60 →Eyewitness news 30 Entertainment Week (VM) 60 The sectional titles of the video magazine "Entertainment Week" do not appear. When die user is in program 3 and presses the Index button, because die indexing VCR 10 reads die VM flag indicating diat die current tape location is a video magazine, it reads die directory of the magazine from line 20 of the VBI. The VCR then displays a directory as follows: P Qg∑a Lenpth Cheers 60 Eyewitness news 30 →Entertainment Week (VM) 60 Dining out Music Plays, musicals Sports Chess Museums Life entertainment Special events This direαory does not show die lengdi of die individual sections of die magazine. In other illustrations, d e individual lengths may be shown. A seαion of die video magazine may have subseαions, such as illustrated where chess is a subsection of sports. The VM packα and subsequendy die direαory recorded on die tape for the video magazine includes die program numbers, the start address, and die stop address of die video magazine. In a first embodiment, die first program of the magazine as a program number 1. As in die illustrative example, "Entertainment Week" has a program number 1 , "Dining out" has a program number 2, and so forth. The start address of "Entertainment Week" is 0. The microprocessor controller 31 adjusts diese numbers to refleα the relative position of die video magazine in the index. As per die illustration, "Entertainment Week" is adjusted to be program 3 with a start address corresponding to die end of program 2. In an alternate embodiment, the direαory of the video magazine is stored in the RAM 33 instead of die tape. By storing the directory in the VBI, less RAM memory space is used for storage. The created tape is structurally die same as an HR tape with VISS marks on the control track, and TP packets written on the VBI of die tape and direαory packets for the video magazine written on the VBI and section tides stored in die RAM 33. Electronic Pro^aπi Guide With Video Clips In anodier implementation of the video magazine, an electronic program guide having a plurality of video clips is broadcast as a video magazine. The electronic program guide may include video clips for the following day or several days. The guide may also include shows and odier broadcasted programs such as movies and sports. Each video clip represents an upcoming show and includes a teaser for that show. Each video clip corresponds to a chapter or segment in the video magazine. The corresponding video data packα includes die tide of die magazine which is the channel number/name, the date and die words "program guide". The subtide of each chapter is the name of the show and die time and date of die broadcast. In addition, die "PLUSCODE™" number for each show is also broadcast in the VM data packet. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in die operation of recording an electronic program guide. At die start of normal system operations (step 8201), the indexing VCR 10 monitors the VBI for the program related information (PRI) (step 8202) until a program guide PRI is detected (step 8203). The microprocessor controller 31 stores the program guide PRI, which includes die "PLUSCODE™" number corresponding to die electronic guide which is broadcasted at a later time, and, in some implementations, on a different channel, in the temporary buffer (step 8204). The indexing VCR 10 displays a prompt to the user to alert him that he may capture the "PLUSCODE™" number to record die electronic program guide at a later time (8026). If the info button is pressed (step 8207), the microprocessor controller 31 retrieves the "PLUSCODE™" number from me temporary buffer (step 8208) and decodes it to generate the channel-date-time-length information which is stored in the VCR record stack as described above (step 8209). FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing die steps employed in die operation of the index funαions for an electronic guide using die indexing VCR. While die indexing VCR is in a ready mode (step 8211), it monitors whedier an index command has been transmitted (step 8212). When it has, the indexing VCR 10 displays a directory as shown in FIG. 48 (step 8213). If an exit command has been sent (step 8214), the VCR enters a ready mode at step 8211. Otherwise, the VCR waits for the user to exit or seleα an entry from the displayed index (step 8216). If die seleαed entry is not "video magazine" (step 8217), the indexing VCR 10 performs a search function in accordance to d at described above in conjunction widi FIG. 35 (step 8218). The count of VISS marks for programs on the tape after the video magazine is adjusted to include die number of VISS marks within the video magazine. On die other hand, if video magazine has been seleαed at step 8217, die indexing VCR 10 advances die tape to the seleαed video magazine (step 8219) and reads d e subtide index from the VBI (step 8221). The indexing VCR 10 dien displays die subtitle index as shown in FIG. 49 (step 8222). The indexing VCR men waits for either the user to select an entry (step 8223) or for the user to exit (step 8224). If the user has entered a seleαion from die subtitle index, die indexing VCR 10 advances die tape to the seleαion (step 8226) and begins playing the tape (step 8227). The VCR then reads the "PLUSCODE™" number from the VBI and stores it in the RAM 33 (step 8228). If the user presses the record button (step 8229), die indexing VCR 10 decodes die "PLUSCODE™" number and stores the corresponding channel-date-time-length information in die record stack for timer programming of the VCR and returns to die ready mode at step 8211 (step 8232). In an alternate embodiment to FIG. 47, at step 8221, the indexing VCR 10 also reads die "PLUSCODE™" numbers associated widi die programs and stores them in die RAM 33 when the subtide index information is transferred from the VBI to die RAM for display. Further, at step 8223 the user can record an entry while looking at the display subtide index of FIG. 49 by pressing the record button on die remote controller. The indexing VCR 10 dien retrieves the "PLUSCODE™" number from the RAM, decodes it into die channel, date, time and lengdi information and stores it in the record stack at step 8231. This embodiment allows the user the option of seleαing shows from the directory screen for recording widiout viewing die corresponding video clip. Electronic Program Guide With A Video Grid And Video Clips In yα another embodiment of the video magazine, the broadcaster broadcasts an electronic program guide wherein the electronic guide includes die program tide, channel, date, and time of upcoming programs as well as an associated video clip which is identical to die video clips previously described above in die Electronic Program Guide Widi Video Clips embodiment. In that embodiment, me electronic guide is transmitted in d e form of VBI text data. Unlike that embodiment, this electronic program guide transmits both die menus and die video clips as full frame video. Accordingly, all die information displayed on the screen is transmitted as video. The display is not limited by die charaαer generator in the VCR. To produce an electronic guide, die broadcaster or guide producer creates graphics by computer or odier electronic devices or by hand. The broadcaster dien generates video images of the graphics by filming or recording. The video images are then broadcasted as a video magazine. Along widi die video images, the broadcaster transmits addressing information for correlating the images on the screen with odier video images, "PLUSCODE™" number or channel-date-length-time corresponding to a program depiαed in the guide widi a future broadcast, and position information for correlating positions on die screen with die program and die odier information broadcasted in d e VBI. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram illustrating the electronic program guide widi a video grid and video clips widi an exploded view of a movie guide portion of die guide. An electronic program guide 3740 has a guide menu and a plurality of video sections (also called video chapters). The guide menu contains information for the tide and descriptions of d e video seαions displayed in locations (or cells) arranged in a grid pattern on die screen. Along widi die guide menu, die broadcaster transmits in the VBI die location of each cell of the grid and d e start address and die stop address for die corresponding video seαion. Each video seαion represents the program listings for one of a plurality of categories of programs, such as movies, sports or comedy. Furthermore, each video seαion has a plurality of chapter menus spaced apart in time in the broadcasted guide or along die tape after recording and a plurality of movie video clip seαions between the video menus. As part of the video menu, part of the information related to the upcoming programs for the associated broadcaster is transmitted or recorded as a video image. This information is arranged so diat when die associated video is displayed, die information for each program of the menu is displayed in cells arranged in a grid on die screen. This information may be in different fonts and colors. It may also include pictures of aαors or scenes of the show or advertiser or show logos. Information relating to the position of each cell, the start and stop addresses, and die "PLUSCODE™" numbers for die corresponding video clip is transmitted in die VBI of die first video menu of the video seαion. The addresses may be timed at a particular tape speed or lengdi. Within each grid, a plurality of programs and associated information is displayed in a respeαive location on the grid. The charaαer generator in the VCR provides a cursor which is superimposed over die video grid displayed on die screen. The user controls the position of the cursor using die remote controller. The microprocessor controller 31 tracks the cursor position and correlates it to the associated program and video clip for that position stored in d e VBI. Although shown pictorially in FIG. 50 as being along side die movie guide, the information associated widi each cell in die grid is transmitted in the vertical blanking interval along with each of the video sections. After reading die VBI, die microprocessor controller 31 stores this information in the RAM 33. Alternatively, the information in the VBI may be broadcasted widi each subsequent video guide and read from the VBI as each subsequent guide is displayed. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing die steps employed in the operation of the indexing VCR for an electronic program guide using a video grid and video clips. As a precursor to beginning the operation in FIG. 51, in a manner similar to steps 8211-8217 of FIG. 47, the user has selected d e indexing function of die VCR and from the displayed directory seleαed die entry on the directory corresponding to die electronic program guide widi video grids and video clips. In response to the user having seleαed die electronic program guide, die indexing VCR advances die tape to the beginning of die program guide, using die tape directory (step 3741). The VCR reads die vertical blanking interval for the guide information and stores it in the RAM 33 (step 3742). The guide information includes die start and stop addresses and die cursor location for each of die video seαions. The guide information funαions as the directory information. The indexing VCR reads die category guide menu from the video tape and displays it on the screen (step 3743). The length of die guide menu on die tape may be a single frame or frames covering several minutes. For guide menus having a few frames, the VCR is in the play and still frame mode allowing the user to browse the guide menu. Alternatively, die images of die still frame may be stored digitally and dien displayed. If die guide menu contains multiple pages, die user advances pages by commanding die VCR to advance by using me frame advance button, or alternatively, a page button. In this mode, die VCR responds to a page command as it would a frame advance command. By using the cursor buttons on the remote controller (step 3744), the user can move the cursor on die screen (step 3745). By pressing the exit button (step 3746), die user may return to the directory of die entire video tape (step 3747). Otherwise, die user selects from the category guide menu using the enter button to seleα the highlighted menu entry (step 3748). As an illustrative example, the seleαed entry will be described in view of the movie guide shown in FIG. 50. While discussed as a movie guide, this description also pertains to the odier guides. After die user selects the movie guide, using die addressing information, the VCR fast forwards die tape to the position for die movie guide grid which it knows from the information read from die VBI after die tape advances to die program guide (step 3749). The VCR reads the chapter information from the VBI where the chapter corresponds to die information for the movie video seαion (step 3750). As noted above, this information relates the position of each cell, the start and stop addresses, and die "PLUSCODE™" numbers for die corresponding video clip to die tide of die program. The VCR stores this information in me RAM 33. As described above for die displaying die category guide menu, die VCR similarly displays die chapter guide for the movie video section (step 3751). As widi die guide menu, by using die cursor keys (step 3752), the user moves the cursor through the chapter guide (steps 3753). Alternatively, die user may exit the chapter guide and return to die guide menu as described above (step 3754). If die user elects to view an entry from the movie guide (step 3755), die VCR reads from the RAM 33 die start address for the seleαed program and advances die tape to the video clip (step 3759). The VCR dien enters the play mode and plays the video clip (step 3760). If the viewer wishes to record the program associated widi die clip that he is viewing, the user presses the record button (step 3761). In response therαo, die VCR reads from the RAM 33 die "PLUSCODE™" number associated widi die video clip and stores the number in the record stack for later recording (step 3757). The VCR then advances to die guide chapter. If die viewer does not record a selection after die video clip, die video clip ends and by dαecting the stop address of the video clip (step 3762), die VCR knows the dαeαed video from die video tape is a movie guide and displays die guide chapter at step 3751. From the guide chapter menu, the viewer may record die program without viewing die video tape (step 3756). In response to a record command, die VCR reads from die RAM 33 die corresponding "PLUSCODE™" number, stores it in the record stack (step 3757), and continues to display die guide chapter at step 3751. In various alternate embodiments, the number of grid cells displayed for d e program guide or die guide chapter may be variable with die number of grid cells transmitted in die VBI data. In odier embodiments, die layout of die video tape may have one movie guide section widi video clips following serially on the tape. Upon the end of each video clip die VCR having dαeαed die stop address dien advances d e tape to the corresponding movie guide. In yα another embodiment, several chapter guide menus may be dispersed throughout the tape so that access time of these menus is reduced. Other Features FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in the operation of temporarily indexing portions of a video tape between VISS marks. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the steps employed in me operation of playing temporarily indexed portions of a video tape between VISS marks. As an overview, a user may wish to access video information recorded between VISS marks. As an alternative to marking the seleαed portion with an additional VISS mark or another type of mark, the indexing VCR 10 stores the absolute addresses of die selected video portion in response to user seleαed commands. This feature may be used for example when one VISS mark in a real estate magazine designates die start of homes for sale in Pasadena, while d e next VISS mark designates die start of homes in La Canada. After viewing the recording of die houses in Pasadena and d e PRI accompanying the video, die user may want to show his wife one particular house at a later time. Referring now to FIG. 52, while the user is playing a tape (step 8240), the indexing VCR 10 monitors the VBI for die presence of a PRI (step 8241). When a PRI is deteαed (step 8242), die PRI is stored in the temporary buffer (step 8243). Steps 8241-8243 correspond to die monitoring steps described above for die PRI. When die user wants to mark the video for later viewing, he presses button X on the remote controller. Button X may be any button, such as die VCRPLUS+™ button, on the remote controller that is not used in die PRI processing routine. When button X is pressed (step 8244), die indexing VCR 10 stores die current PRI in die storage buffer (8246). The indexing VCR calculates d e absolute start address of die location of die tape indicated (step 8247) and stores the absolute start address in die RAM 33 (step 8248). The indexing VCR 10 d en waits for a second X command to indicate die end of die seleαed video portion (step 8249). In response to die X command, die indexing VCR 10 calculates die absolute stop address (step 8251) and stores it in the RAM 33 (step 8252). When die user wishes to later find die temporary indexed video portion, referring now to FIG. 53, die user pulls up the stored PRI menu as described above in conneαion with FIG. 43. The user selects the PRI (step 8260) and transmits a play command (step 8261). The indexing VCR 10 retrieves the TTD and die absolute addresses from the memory (step 8262). The indexing VCR 10 measures the present address of die tape (step 8262) and depending on the direαion to d e selected video portion, fast forwards or rewinds die tape (step 8264) until the measured present address equals die start address retrieved from memory (step 8266). The indexing VCR 10 dien starts playing the tape (step 8267) and measures die present address of die tape (step 8268), and when die present address equals die stop address (step 8269), the VCR stops die tape (step 8271). A portion of the auxiliary information changes infrequendy. For example, in the program ID, the broadcast channel call letters may change only as often as every several years. By storing these relatively time independent variables in the RAM 33, the access time to this portion of the auxiliary information is reduced. Widi the channel call letters stored in memory, the indexing VCR 10 retrieves the call letters when the user changes the television to a new channel and displays die new channel call letters on die television widiout retrieving or having to wait to retrieve the new program ID information from the VBI. The channel call letter library may be collected eidier during an initial sα-up procedure of die indexing VCR 10 by scanning all channels and reading d e program ID from line 21 for each channel or, alternatively, the program ID may be read during die first use of each channel and die channel call letters stored in die RAM 33. By way of background, die VCR PLUS+™ video programmer uses a channel mapping system in which the channel numbers are assigned to certain cable channels in each area of the country which differ from the received channel number. For example, the cable channel HBO may be assigned channel 33. Further broadcast channel frequencies are often mapped to different cable channel frequencies by die local cable operators, for example, the broadcast channel 28 for station KCET may appear as cable channel 6. The channel map relates the guide channel numbers to the received channel numbers. Similar to channel call letters, the channel mapping numbers are changed infrequendy. Thus, in a similar manner, die indexing VCR 10 can automatically collect a channel map data, either after first use of each channel or during an initial sα-up routine in which all channels are scanned. The "PLUSCODE™" numbers used by a VCR PLUS+™ video programmer inherendy include die guide channel numbers as part of die encode channel-date-time-length data. The broadcast stations, as part of the program related information or the channel specific program guide, may broadcast die "PLUSCODE™" numbers. The indexing VCR 10 reads these numbers, decodes diem, and establishes the relationship of the decoded channel numbers with die received channel numbers. Another paramαer that changes infrequendy are the pointer attributes, such as line number, data rate, error correction, and encryption, of VBI lines for CSPG. Although CSPG may be transmitted more or less continuously on one or more VBI lines, die pointers to such lines may not be repeated at a high rate on line 21, because other fields of data are present. As a result, when a user switches to a new channel and requests the CSPG, he may have to wait until die next CSPG pointer appears on line 21. By storing the pointer attributes for the CSPG lines in memory, the indexing VCR 10 can reads tiiose lines immediately after the user has switched die channel. Format for Data Received on the VBI The auxiliary information (program ID, CSPG, PRI) described above is broadcasted on line 21, field 2 of die VBI, according to die specification proposed by the EIA. This information shall be decoded by die indexing VCR 10 according to the specifications. The channel specific program guide and die program related information are broadcast as text data on some VBI lines, which are referenced by pointers on line 1, field 2. The recording waveform is identical to the E.I.A., line 21, field 1-2 waveform. The text data format is similar to the E.I.A., line 21 Text Mode Data Services and die Extended Data Services. However, the data is encrypted before being sent. The following data format allows for future expansion. Pointer FIG. 54 is a schematic view showing die format for the pointer packα data broadcasted in the VBI for auxiliary information. The pointer packet is similar to the E.I.A. line 21 field 2 Supplemental Data Location packα. It is used as a pointer to point to another VBI line. Four to thirty-two informational charaαers are used to indicate die line number where the information is located. A pointer packα data packα 2605 has the following symbols: start code, type, additional ID, pointer description (1) and pointer (1) through pointer description(m) and pointer (m), stop code and check sum. Table X shows the length in bytes and the value for each symbol. The start code indicates die packα is eidier a new pointer packα (by the value 07 hex) or a continuation packα of die prior packα (by the value 08 hex). The pointer description and die pointer for each of the m pointers have die same data format. The additional number ID symbol further identifies diat die packα is an indexing pointer packα to further distinguish it from other data service systems that may co-exist on line 21, field 2. For multiple line application, die sequence of die Pointers within a given kind of packα indicates die VBI data sequence to be used to re-assemble the data at d e receiving end. The checksum is the modulo 128 sum of me packet from the start code to die stop code. Table X Syjn Start Code Type Additional ID Pointer Description (1) Pointer (1) FIG. 55 is a schematic view showing die format for die CSPG/PRI packα data recorded in the VBI as pointed to by the pointer in line 21 of the VBI. The CSPG and PRI packets are similar in structure and are differentiated by die type code. The packet 2606 comprises the symbols: start code, type, usage, information, stop code and check sum. Table XI shows die length in bytes and die values for die symbols. The CSPG and PRI packets are encrypted before they are encoded onto die VBI. The data stream contains an even number of bytes. An error correction code assures data integrity at the receiving end. A 4 byte long lead-in code on two consecutive VBI lines signifies the start of an encrypted data stream. The decryption circuitry may use it to eidier reset all or synchronize its decode circuitry or decode algorithm as necessary. Multiple packets may be cascaded back to back for encryption. The encrypted data stream is concluded by a 4 byte long termination code on two consecutive VBI lines. For the encrypted and error correαion coded data stream, all 8 data bits may be used. The data slicer/decoder ignores the parity check error deteαed on the encrypted data. The CSPG and PRI packets contain displayable text information. When received, diese packets are stored according to their types in different locations of die memory. As described above in conjunction widi FIG. 27, die RAM 33 contains a PRI packα data temporary buffer and a PRI packα data storage buffer. In addition, the RAM 33 has a CSPG buffer. The CSPG buffer preferably has at least 9600 bits of memory. The PRI storage buffer preferably has at least 7680 bits of memory. The PRI temporary buffer preferably has at least 15,360 bits of memory. As described above, both buffers operate as temporary buffers in a circular mode in which the old data packα data is overwritten by new packα data d at is received. Similarly, the CSPG packet data buffer is also a temporary buffer wherein the old packα data is overwritten by new packα data received. Referring again to FIG. 55, the information field contains displayable text charaαers, non-displayable control charaαers and non-displayable attribute charaαers. The control charaαers and attribute charaαers are executed immediately upon receipt. A control charaαer or an attribute charaαer remain effeαive until it is overwritten by the same control charaαer or an attribute charaαer of a different value. A default mode is defined for each type of control code and attribute. The default is effective at the start of a new data stream. Within die data stream, the default remains effeαive until it is overwritten by a control charaαer or an attribute charaαer. The general form of the information field is as follows: CRTL ATTR displayable displayable ATTR displayable Table Xu shows die control codes and attributes. The basis embodiment includes die default control codes and attributes. The control codes and attributes for the default mode are the basic types and preferably at least diese types that are implemented. Alternately, the indexing VCR 10 may use the optional control codes and attributes. Alternatively to Table XI, the charaαer generator may determine the number of rows and columns in the full page and half page mode. The telephone number attribute indicates diat die data is a telephone number. The microprocessor controller 31 transmits this number to a remote controller that has telephone capability. The user may press dial on die remote controller and automatically call the goods or service provider. The product description attribute indicates diat die associated text is a description of the produα including a phone number that may be used to describe die produα when calling a provider of die produα. The question number attribute indicates diat die associated text is a number for d e question of a game show. The number is in a coded format. The VCR stores in die RAM the question number with die user's answer. This information is transferred at a later time to a contest coordinator who determines from the user's answer the user's score or prize. Other miscellaneous text display related control codes include a Tab code for causing die cursor to shift right three spaces until it reaches the right most column. An indent control code causes the cursor to shift three spaces from the beginning of a new line. A new line control code causes die cursor to go to the beginning of die next line. A CSPGEra control code causes die CSPG packα to be erased from the memory buffer. A PRIEra control code causes die last received PRI packα to be erased from the memory buffer. CSPG/PRI packet data format Table XI Usage Information 2-128 Stop Code Checksum 2 Table XII: Control and attribute codes Control codes Text display size lOr x 24c (Default) 1D 5C 15r x 32c 1D 5D don't care 1D 5E Text page size Full page (Default) ID 40 Half page ID 42 Text display mode Pop-on style (Default) ID 43 Scroll up style ID 44 Single line "crawl" style ID 45 Charaαer sα: Standard line 21 charaαer set (default) ID 46 Extended character sα (as defined in the Draft EIA-60B) ID 47 Japanese Charaαer sα I. ID 48 Japanese Charaαer sα II. ID 49 PRC Charaαer sα GB 2312-80. 1D 4A Korean Standard Charaαer sα: KSC 5601- 1987 1D 4B Print Destination Disable (Default) 1D 4E Print to IR port. 1D 4F Print to serial port. ID 50 Print to IR and serial port. ID 51 Miscellaneous Tab (3 spaces) ID 52 Indent (3 spaces) ID 53 Newline ID 54 CSPGEra ID 55 PRIEra ID 56 Attribute codes Color Blue background white charaαers. (Default) 1C 40 Optional background and foreground color (color combination: broadcaster selectable) 1C 41 **** 1C 4A Charaαer sα Normal size (Default) 1C 4B Double size 1C 4C Printable Printable (Default) 1C 4D Non-printable (hidden). 1C 4E "PLUSCODE™" Number Non-"PLUSCODE™" Number (Default) 1C 4F "PLUSCODE™" Number 1C 50 Telephone Number Non-telephone number (Default) 1C 51 Telephone number 1C 52 Produα description Non-produα description (default) 1C 53 Produα description 1C 54 Question number Non-question number (Default) 1C 55 Question number 1C 56 Electronic coupon Non-electronic coupon (Default) 1C 57 Electronic coupon 1C 58 Keyword Not keyword (Default) 1C 59 Keyword 1C 5A Otiiers Reserved VM Packα FIG. 56 is a schematic view showing the VM packet used for video magazines. A VM packα 2607 comprises the symbols: start code, type, PID, stop code, and check sum. Table XQI shows the length in bytes and values for the symbols. As described above, in connection widi FIG. 45, during die broadcast of video magazines, a set of VM packets are transmitted in die VBI within the program to trigger the indexing VCR 10 to record VISS marks on the control track and TP packets on line 19 of die VBI and create a corresponding direαory that is stored in the RAM 33. The VM packets are located on at least one VBI line which is referenced by a pointer on line 21, field 2 of the VBI. The pointer packα data format is described above in connection widi FIG. 54 where the pointer description equals 65 hex, which indicates a VM packet. The checksum is the modulo 128 sum of me packα from the start code to die stop code. VM Packα Table xm Symbol Length rBvtes) Value Start Code 1 OD hex Type 79 PID same as line 21, field 2 ID packα less start code, type code, end code and checksum Stop Code 1 OF hex Checksum 2 00 hex - 7F hex In an alternate embodiment, the VM packα does not include a PID symbol. Instead, die directory is transmitted as a D(N) data packα in the VBI. Consequendy, die video magazine is transmitted as a PR tape except that die indexing VCR adds die VISS marks in response to the dαeαion of die VM packα. Encryption and Scrambling of Data The data transmitted witiiin the auxiliary information data packets (VM packα, program I.D., CSPG, PRI) is both encrypted and scrambled. The data is encrypted using a secrα key encrypto-system such as the data encryption standard (DES) proposed by IBM and adopted by NBS in 1978. After encryption, d e data is scrambled by using a scrambling key to swap the bits of the encrypted data. The scrambling key is preferably a predetermined sα of numbers that are selected from a number diat is associated widi die data transmitted in die VBI or on tape. For example, for prerecorded tapes, a predetermined number of bits of the tape identification number are used as a key . For example, seven bits, such as bits 22-28, of the tape identification number may be used. The tape manufacturer uses these bits to scramble the data recorded on die tape. In the indexing VCR 10, die tape identification number is read from the VBI and the predαermined sα of bits are used to de- scramble d e encrypted data. As a second example, for broadcasted information, a predαermined number of bits of the data type symbol are used as a key. For example, four bits of the data type symbol may be used. The manufacturer of a master tape used by the broadcaster or the broadcaster itself may use these bits to scramble the data. The indexing VCR 10 reads die type symbol from the broadcasted VBI and retrieves the predαermined set of bits as a key. The indexing VCR 10 dien uses this key to descramble the broadcasted data. One example of scrambling and de-scrambling is to apply die 7 bits to pairs of alpha numeric charaαers in the data and depending upon whedier the bit is one or a zero, swap die charaαers. For example, where a one digit appears the charaαers of the pair are swapped, where a zero appears, die charaαers are not swapped. For example, for a seven bit sequence of 1011001, e phrase CHRISTIE PARKER HALE becomes scrambled by switching die C and H of die first character pair to read HC for the first one in the seven bit sequence. The RI is not swapped because die second bit is a zero; die ST is swapped to TS because die tiiird bit is a 1; d e IE is swapped to read El because die fourth bit is 1; and so forth. In addition, die pattern is repeated for each sα of seven pairs. Spaces are included as a charaαer. Thus, CHRISTIE PARKER HALE becomes HCRITSEI PAJREK RHAEL. By applying die same seven bit sequence 1011001, die charaαer sequence can be de-scrambled. RECOVERING AND DISPLAYING OF DIRECTORY ON-SCREEN The general preference is that, when a tape is inserted into the indexing VCR 10, die directory is displayed on die screen as soon as possible after die user presses die Index button. However, several methods exist for displaying die directory. In the first embodiment, die ΗD, program number, and directory are automatically read when die tape is inserted. In this method, when die tape is inserted, even widiout d e Index button being pressed, d e indexing VCR 10 automatically reads die ΗD and program number from line 19 of the VBI. After determining die type of tape, the indexing VCR 10 dien recovers the directory from eidier e RAM 33 (for HR tapes) or line 20 of die VBI (for PR tapes). The indexing VCR 10 is dien in a ready state for any user command. When die user presses die Index button at any later time, the indexing VCR 10 displays the direαory on screen instantaneously. However, if die user requests non-indexing funαions right after he inserts the tape, the indexing VCR 10 will not be ready until after the indexing VCR 10 has read die ΗD, address and directory. In die second embodiment, the ΗD and program number are automatically read at tape insertion and die directory is read when d e Index button is pressed. In this method, after the indexing VCR 10 reads die TTD and program number at tape insertion, die indexing VCR 10 is dien ready for user commands. When die user presses the Index button, die indexing VCR 10 recovers, having previously identified die type of tape, the directory from the RAM 33 or the VBI. By reaching the ready state sooner, die user is able to control the indexing VCR 10 sooner. In an alternate embodiment to the second embodiment, the indexing VCR 10 reads and displays a portion of die directory, e.g., die first page, after die Index button is pushed. This takes less time than reading die entire direαory. As the user is reading die displayed directory, die indexing VCR 10 recovers die remainder of the directory. Alternatively, the indexing VCR 10 recovers die remainder of the directory only in response to a user command, such as next page. In die tiiird embodiment, the indexing VCR 10 takes no action upon tape insertion. After the tape is inserted, die indexing VCR 10 is ready for user commands. When die user presses die index button, die indexing VCR 10 reads die ΗD, program number, and direαory. Direαorv In VCR RAM As described above, a library memory (LIBMEM) can be sα up in the VCR, eidier as part of the RAM or separate from die RAM. In a specific embodiment, instead of storing directory information on a secondary memory (e.g. magnαic strip or semiconductor) or on die control track or video track of the tape, they are stored in the library memory LIBMEM. In accordance widi tiiis specific embodiment, each tape for which a direαory is stored in the LIBMEM is assigned a volume label (e.g. a volume number). When the tape is inserted into die VCR, die volume label is used to access die corresponding directory from the library. It is anticipated diat a tape, for which a directory is created in me LIBMEM of one machine, may be transported to another VCR. Such transportation poses several problems. First, if a machine wherein the above-described funαions are not implemented, die tape position may be disturbed so diat when die tape is returned, the current tape position is incorrect and die value of VOLNO as well as die value of die tape reel counter at the eject point are lost. Second, even if die machine to which the tape is transported is capable of providing die above described functions, it may not have stored die direαory of die tape. According to d e above implementation, a counter, VOLCNTR, is kept in a non-volatile memory. The counter provides a count of die number of tapes of which a corresponding directory is already kept in the LIBMEM (hereinafter called an "indexed tape"). The value VOLNO 1016 (see FIG. 2) of VOLCNTR can therefore be used for assigning a unique volume number to an unindexed tape (i.e. one which does not have a directory stored in die LIBMEM). Refer to the flow chart shown in FIG. 57. When a tape 40 is inserted into die VCR 1, die microprocessor controller 31 checks whether d e tape is indexed by reading die tape, at the point of insertion, for a volume number (step 4601). If a volume number is present, the tape is an indexed tape and die volume is used to retrieve a directory from the library (step 4602). If a volume number is not present, the tape is searched for a volume number (step 4603). If a volume number is not found, die microprocessor controller 31 creates a directory for die tape in die library (step 4604). The creation includes die steps of retrieving the value of VOLCNTR from the memory, assigning that value to the tape (the VOLCNTR is also updated) and based upon the value of VOLΝO allocating a space in the library to the tape. The space may be allocated based upon die value of VOLΝO, such as by using die formula: ADDR(new direαory) = BASE + VOLΝO * volsize That is, d e address of die direαory for the inserted tape is equal to a base number (which may be equal to the starting address of LIBMEM plus a constant) plus VOLΝO times the size of a directory. The value of VOLΝO is also displayed on a screen (step 4605). Preferably, numbered stickers are provided by die cassette manufactures and packaged with a new cassette. The user can then use d e appropriate sticker(s) to label the cassette and/or its case or jacket. Although not performed in this implementation, die microprocessor controller 31 may also write the value of VOLΝO at this step to a predefined position of the tape (e,g, the beginning), using one of me methods described above. For example, the value of VOLΝO may be written on a predefined location (such as the beginning) of the control track, or in a predefined VBI portion. It needs to be pointed out that if VOLΝO is written on die control track, existing sensing and electronic components can be used in reading its value and it can be accessed at fast forward or rewind speed, whereas if VOLΝO is written on the VBI of die video track, a VBI encoder, such as the one disclosed above, is required and die value of VOLΝO can be accessed only at PLAY speed. Instead of writing it at the beginning of die tape, the value of VOLΝO is written when the tape is ejected. When die tape is ejeαed, die value of VOLΝO is written and d e tape is rewound to the original stopping point (the "ejeα point"). The address of the ejeα point (e.g. die tape reel counter value) is also stored in a predefined field in the corresponding directory. If a VOLΝO is found on die tape, die tape position where the volume label is found is noted (step 4606). The volume label is men used to retrieve a direαory from die memory (step 4607). The tape is then rewound to die beginning and die tape counter is reset. From the directory, die tape counter value of where die VOLΝO should be found is also noted (step 4608). If these numbers match the tape position as noted in step 4606 (step 4611), the directory is assumed to be die right directory and die direαory is used (step 4610). If the two numbers do not match, a directory is created in a temporary memory space; and when the tape is ejeαed, this directory will be delαed (i.e. not stored into the library) (step 4609). In the above described embodiment, the contents of LIBMEM and VOLCNTR must not be lost due to a power failure of die VCR. In one implementation, the memory space of LIBMEM and VOLCNTR is provided by non-volatile memory devices such as electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM). In another implementation, battery backup is provided for die memory which form the two memory spaces. In another implementation, the directory of a tape is written back to the tape itself (either on die control track or in die VBI portion of the video track) at the point of ejeαion, so that the direαory can be used, if necessary for recovery. In still anodier implementation, the content store in LIBMEM is periodically backed up to a "directory backup tape", which can then be used to recover the library after a power failure. In anodier implementation, if the VCR fails to read the VOLNO when a tape is inserted, the microprocessor controller 31 sends a message to the screen to prompt die user for die value of VOLNO. The user can enter die VOLNO based upon die value shown on the sticker carried on die cassette housing. Based upon die inputted value of die VOLNO, die directory of die tape is accessed. Enhanced Funαions The funαions provided by die VCR in one specific embodiment of the present invention are shown in die flow charts of Figs. 58. Referring to me flow-chart shown in FIG. 59, when a cassette tape 40 is loaded into the VCR 1, die microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted (step 2710). The microprocessor controller 31 then performs a check to see whether die inserted cassette tape is an enhanced cassette or a standard cassette (step 2711). An enhanced cassette is a cassette provided widi a secondary memory for storing directory information; however, if the VCR is implemented in such a way d at directory information is stored on die cassette tape (e.g. control track or VBI), step 2711 can be skipped. Depending upon die implementation, the secondary memory can either be a semiconductor memory or a magnαic strip carried by die cassette. The test can be performed in any one of many techniques, including d e techniques described above, i.e. detecting for presence of an electrical conductor or a light-refleαive material on the cassette, or reading a predefined code on die magnαic strip. If the cassette is an enhanced cassette, d e feature control field FTCNTL 1013 in die operation flags of the RAM 33 is filled. Other control parameters, such as the lengdi of die cassette tape 1012, and access paramαers (e.g. bit density of a magnetic strip) of the secondary memory is read and stored in appropriate fields in die operation flags (step 2712). The microprocessor controller 31 then locates a directory from the secondary memory (step 2713). If the VCR is implemented in such a way mat direαory information is stored on die cassette tape, or in a library stored in the RAM indexed by a volume number stored on die cassette tape, as previously described, die microprocessor controller 31 may have to aαivate the motor and mechanical control logic circuit 5 as well as the control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to search for the directory. If die directory information is found (step 2714), it is read into die in-use directory area 1021 (see FIG. 2) in die RAM 33 (step 2715). The directory information is used to fill a screen such as die one shown in FIG. 40a (step 2716). If the cassette is not an enhanced cassette, a screen, showing the conventional functions of a VCR is displayed (step 2717). If die directory is not found, a blank screen or a warning screen may be shown. Referring to FIG. 60a, the enhanced screen contains a listing of the titles and lengths of die programs recorded on die cassette. In one implementation, six programs are displayed each time. The programs not shown can be accessed by scrolling or paging, using eidier die "PG DN" key for scrolling or paging forward or die "PG UP" key for scrolling or paging backward. The enhanced directory screen 1101 comprises several columns. The first column contains the indexes of die displayed programs, each represented by a number of 1-2 digits, widi no leading zeros. In a first embodiment, the index number (or program number) is generated by die microprocessor controller 31. In a second embodiment, die indexing VCR 10 does not generate die index number. The index number is part of the text tide. For PR tapes or video magazines, the program or section numbers are included as part of die text. This allows the publisher to control die layout of the display. In a third embodiment, the indexing VCR 10 generates die index number for HR tapes and die broadcaster/publisher generates diem for video magazines and PR tapes. Alternatively, a "bullα" symbol may be used instead of a program number. The second column contains d e titles of the programs. A tide can have a lengdi of up to 32 characters. Valid characters are alphabets from A-Z in upper case, numerals 0-9, and punctuation marks such as comma (",") period (".") semicolon (";") colon (":") exclamation mark ("!") at/each ("@") pound sign ("#") slash ("/") question mark ("?") space (" ") The tide may be obtained from the VBI. Optionally, it may be input by die user (e.g. entry #3). If a recorded program has no accompanying tide information broadcasted in the VBI, die broadcast date and time of die program are used as die title (e.g. entry #4). When a tape segment has no program recorded thereon, the corresponding second column shows the word "BLANK" (e.g. entry #2). The last entry of the second column has an entry with the word "END" in me tide field (entry #5). If the tape is a blank tape, "END" would be die only entry on the screen. The tiiird column contains the lengths of the corresponding programs, each represented by a number (1-3 digits long) indicating die number of minutes of the corresponding program. If d e cassette is blank, die screen would show a single "END" entry and die corresponding length field would equal die total length of die cassette. If there is no blank space between the last program on die tape and die end of d e tape, a zero will be displayed in die length field of the "END" entry. Optionally but advantageously, die screen also shows the current operating speed of die VCR; diat is, whetiier die VCR is sα at SP, LP, SLP, etc. Moreover, in one implementation of the present invention, if die operating speed of die VCR is changed, respective lengths of d e programs will be recalculated and displayed widi die recalculated value. Identifying A Recorded Program The enhanced tape allows a user to seleα a program from the directory screen for playback by entering the corresponding number of the program as displayed on die first column of die enhanced screen and dien press die "PLAY" key. For example, to watch program number #3, die "3" key and the "PLAY" key are pressed in sequence. Referring to FIG. 59b, when the microprocessor controller 31 receives a number key (step 2720), it retrieves a variable ("NO.") and adds die entered number by concatenating it to that variable (step 2721). The microprocessor controller 31 then waits for anodier key input (step 2722). When a key is entered, die microprocessor controller checks to see if the newly-entered key is another number key (step 2723). If the newly-entered key is another input key, its value is again added to die variable "NO." Typically, the number is added by shifting "NO." by one digit and adds die newly-entered number tiiereto (step 2721). The microprocessor controller 31 waits for a non-number key (e.g. "PLAY", "RECORD") to be entered (step 2722). When a non-number key is received, the microprocessor controller 31 checks to see if the tape is positioned at die program with die input number. If the tape is not positioned at die seleαed program, either a rewind or a fast forward operation is performed, depending on die current position of die tape, to move the tape to the beginning of the program having the input number, and a screen, such as FIG. 60b, is displayed (step 2724). After the tape is moved to the selected program, the funαion specified by die non-number key is then performed (step 2725). Plaving A Recorded Program Referring to FIG. 59c, when the "PLAY" key is pressed (step 2731), die microprocessor controller 31 waits until the tape stops moving (step 2732). When die tape stops, the microprocessor controller 31 retrieves direαory information of the program (step 2733) and displays it on a screen (step 2734) as shown in FIG. 60c for a few seconds. Thereafter, the microprocessor controller 31 initiates the VCR to play die cassette (step 2735). Optionally, in the first few seconds after the tape is started, die word "PLAYING" is displayed on the screen (step 2735). The VCR continues to play die tape until it reaches die end or until it receives a STOP command. Instant Recording Instant recording is an option which allows a user to record a program for a seleαed lengdi of time. The option can be initiated at any time instant, whether the user is watching a television broadcast or a taped program. Referring to the flow-chart shown in FIG. 59d, when die microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted by die RECORD key (step 2741), it displays a screen, such as FIG. 60d, to prompt the user to enter the length of recording desired (step 2742). The length can be entered as a three-digit number representing me number of minutes desired (step 2743). Numbers widi less man three digits are appended by leading zeros, either automatically or manual, depending on die implementation. The entered numbers are confirmed by die "ENTER" key (step 2744). If three zeros are entered, tiiey are inteφreted as a "CANCEL" command (step 2745). Instant recording may be initiated when die tape is positioned witiiin a recorded program, within a blank space, or at die end of die tape (step 2746). When the microprocessor controller 31 receives the "ENTER" key, it checks the current tape position against the tape direαory (step 27410). If the current tape position is at a blank area which has a length equal to or longer than die entered lengdi of die recording (step 27411), the microprocessor controller 31 initiates a Recording Procedure to record die program (see FIG. 59e). Referring now to FIG. 41a, there is shown a flow chart illustrating die general steps of die Recording Procedure. When an appropriate tape segment is found, die address of die segment is passed to die Recording Procedure. In step 3000, the microprocessor controller 31 stores the current value of the tape counter. In step 3001, the microprocessor controller 31 calls a VBI Decode Procedure to sα up die VBI decoder 60a in order to obtain program information (e.g. tide) from the VBI. Referring now to FIG. 61b, there is shown a flow chart illustrating the general steps of die VBI Decode Procedure. The VBI Decode Procedure has two parameters, a VBI line number (LINE#) and a VBI field number (FIELD#). The microprocessor controller 31, in response to these paramαers, sets the VBI decoder 60a to decode line 21 and field 2 of die VBI (step 3101). When the VBI decoder 60a detects VBI line 21 and field 2, it interrupts me microprocessor controller 31 (step 3102) and passes the value of line 21 and field 2 of die VBI to it. Referring back to FIG. 61a, after the microprocessor controller 31 initiates the VBI Decode Procedure, it sets the VCR 1 to record (step 3002). When die microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted by d e VBI decoder 60a, it receives the output from the VBI decoder and checks the control code and type code of d e output (steps 3003 and 3004). If die control code is "01" and die type code is "03", die microprocessor controller 31 reads die VBI output and puts it into the "program title" field of die corresponding directory entry (step 3005). If the control code is "01 " and die type code is "04", the microprocessor controller 31 reads die VBI output and puts it into the "program type" field of die corresponding entry (step 3006). If the control code is "01" and die type code is "05", die microprocessor controller 31 reads die VBI output and puts it into the "program audience" field of the corresponding entry (step 3008). If the control code is "07" and die type code is "01", the microprocessor controller 31 reads d e VBI output and stores it in a temporary time-of-day variable (step 3007). The microprocessor controller 31 then checks to see if the program tide from the VBI is a blank (step 3009). If so, then it puts the time-of-day value into die program tide field of the directory entry (step 3010). Referring to FIG. 61c, when the recording finishes, die microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted (step 30011). It dien notes die current value of the tape counter and subtracts it from the value stored at die beginning of the recording to find die lengdi of die recorded program (step 30012). In step 30013, die directory of the cassette is updated if it is stored in a magnetic strip and accessed by a movable head or if it is stored in a semiconductor memory. In step 30014, if there is an entry in the VCR library for die tape (as will be described below), die library is updated. Referring now to FIG. 59e, optionally, when the screen is showing a broadcast program, the microprocessor controller 31 indicates the recording procedure (step 27414) and displays die word "RECORDING" (step 27415) on the lower part of the screen. Moreover, if die program tide is transmitted, it is read and displayed on die screen (step 27416) next to the word "RECORDING". Referring back to FIG. 59d, if the current position of the tape is at a non-blank segment (step 27412) or if the current position is at a blank segment but die blank's lengdi is shorter man die lengdi of die desired recording (step 27413), die microprocessor controller 31 performs a search procedure to seleα d e directory for an appropriate segment for performing die recording. The appropriate segment can be selected in several ways. One way is to search, starting from die beginning of die directory, for the first blank segment whose length is longer or equal to the requested lengdi of die recording. If die programs recorded on die tape are as shown in FIG. 60f and die required lengdi of die recording is 20 minutes, segment #4 (length = 120 minutes) will be seleαed. However, such seleαion would cause inefficient use of the tape. Therefore, another way is to search die directory for the shortest blank segment whose length is longer or equal to the required lengdi of die recording. Using die example of FIG. 60f, segment #6 Gength=24 minutes) will be used. In tiiis way, segment #4 can be used for recording a longer program. Returning to FIG. 59e, after die microprocessor controller 31 searches for an appropriate segment, it displays a warning screen, such as the screen shown in FIG. 60e, on the screen (step 27417), suggesting to the user to perform the recording on segment #6. After the warning screen of FIG. 60e is displayed, die microprocessor controller 31 monitors for an input from the user (step 27418). If the user presses the RECORD key (step 27419), the microprocessor controller 31 then performs operations described in steps 27414, 27415 and 27416 described above. If die user presses the CANCEL key (step 27420), the recording is cancelled and die previous screen is displayed (step 27421). If d e user presses die number key that corresponds to die number shown on the sαeen (step 27422), the microprocessor controller 31 moves the tape to the position corresponding to die entered number (step 27423) and starts recording. When die tape is moved, a screen such as FIG. 60b is shown. VCR PLUS +™ RECORDING The VCR can optionally be initiated to perform a "PLUSCODE™" number recording, in a similar way as a VCR PLUS+™ remote controller from Gemstar Development Corporation of California. "PLUSCODE™" number recording is also described in U.S. patent application serial number 07/676,934 filed March 27, 1991 and is incorporated herein by reference. "PLUSCODE™" and VCR PLUS+™ are trademarks of Gemstar Development Corporation. "PLUSCODE™" number recording is initiated by a "VCR PLUS+™" key, which can be performed at any time, even when a broadcast or a recording is being watched, or when a rewind or fast forward operation is in progress, or when there is no cassette tape loaded in die VCR. In a specific implementation, enough memory space is provided in die CDTL buffer 1024 for storing eight "PLUSCODE™" number settings. Referring to FIG. 59f, when die microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted by die VCR PLUS+™ key (step 2751), it first checks whether die CDTL buffer 1024 is full (step 27516). If die buffer is not full, the microprocessor controller 31 displays a screen, such as FIG. 60g, on the television screen (step 2752). The microprocessor controller 31 then waits for an input from the user (step 2753). If the input is a number key (step 2754), it is added to die entered digits (step 2755). If die input is die ERASE key (step 2756), the already-received digits are erased (step 2757). If die input is die ENTER key (step 2758), the microprocessor controller 31 checks whether the input is a valid "PLUSCODE™" number (step 2759). If die input is an invalid "PLUSCODE™" number, a screen such as FIG. 60h is displayed to prompt the user to re-enter the "PLUSCODE™" number (step 27510). If die "CANCEL" key is pressed (step 27514) under diat screen, die "PLUSCODE™" number recording is cancelled (step 27515). If die "PLUSCODE™" number is valid at step 2759, a check is made to dαermine whedier tiiere is a "PLUSCODE™" number conflicts (step 27516). A confliα occurs when the "PLUSCODE™" number setting is for a recording which will occur at the same time as anodier scheduled recording. Referring to FIG. 59g, if there is no conflict, a prompt screen such as FIG. 60i is displayed (step 27511). The user can then press: "1" to sα the recording for once only; "2" to set the recording weekly; "3" to set die recording every weekday. Pressing any key other than these tiiree keys would have no effect (step 27512). Upon receiving one of these three keys, the input is saved (step 27513), a confirmation screen is displayed for confirming the recording data, such as . channel number . Date (MM/DD/YR) . Start Time (in eidier 24-hour or in 12-hour AM/PM format) . Stop Time (in either 24-hour or in 12-hour AM/PM format) . Recording option, that is, whether die recording is to be performed once, weekly or daily. If die data on d e confirming screen is correα, the user presses the "ENTER" key and die recording is sα. If die data is incorreα, the user can press die "CANCEL" key to re-enter the "PLUSCODE™" number. If me CDTL buffer 1024 is already full when die "VCR Plus+™" key is pressed, a warning screen such as FIG. 60j is displayed (step 27517). The warning screen advises die user diat die buffer is full and that he needs to delete a program from the buffer before anodier program can be added. Under FIG. 60j, the user is advised diat he review d e list of programs stored in the CDTL buffer 1024 so that he/she can delαe one or more setting to make room for the new setting. The user is also advised that he can press the "CANCEL" key to exit "PLUSCODE™" number recording. "PLUSCODE™" number settings can be reviewed by pressing the "REVIEW" key. A review operation can be performed at any time and can even be performed when there is no tape in die video player. Wid reference to FIG. 59k, when the microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted by die REVIEW key (step 2761), it retrieves all die "PLUSCODE™" number settings (step 2762) from the CDTL buffer 1024. Based upon the data, a screen such as FIG. 60k is displayed (step 2763). If the REVIEW option is entered as a result of a full CDTL buffer 1024 during the VCR Plus+™ operation, die screen of FIG. 60k would list eight programs. On a review screen, each entry would comprise die following columns: ■ Number of the entry. This number is used for ordering and reference. "PLUSCODE™" number settings are listed in chronological order so that die program to be recorded first will appear at the top of die screen and die programs to be recorded last will appear at die bottom of the screen. - Channel number of die program to be recorded. - Date of die program, expressed in MM-DD format. If the program is to be recorded daily (i.e. Monday to Friday), die letter "D" would appear immediately to die right of die date. If die program is to be recorded weekly, a letter "W" would appear immediately to die right of the date. ■ Time of die program. This information is expressed in 24-bour clock and in HH:MM format. Alternatively, the information may be expressed in 12-hour AM/PM clock format. ■ Length of die set recording. This information is expressed in number of minutes. ■ Tape status. This information is displayed when a tape having the enhanced features is used. The microprocessor controller 31 checks the feature control field (FTCNTL) to see if an enhanced tape is inserted (step 2764). If the inserted tape is an enhanced tape, the microprocessor controller 31 searches the direαory to see if there is a blank segment for each setting (step 2765). If there is enough blank space on the tape to accommodate a setting, the word "OK" is written in the sixth column of die corresponding entry (step 2766). If there is not enough blank space on the inserted tape for the corresponding setting, the word "NO" will appear in this field. The value in this field may change if a different tape is inserted for die new tape has different amount of blank space. The field will disappear if die inserted tape is not an enhanced tape. After the review screen is displayed, die microprocessor controller 31 waits for an input from the user (step 2767). Referring now to FIG. 591, when the user enters a number key (1-8 in the example of a full CDTL buffer noted above) (step 2768), die corresponding entry is seleαed (step 2769). If die user dien presses die ERASE key (step 27610), die seleαed entry is delαed from the CDTL buffer 1024 (step 27611). If the "REVIEW" key is pressed again under die review screen (step 27612) or if the tape is ejected from the VCR, the review operation is terminated. Referring back to step 27516 of FIGs. 39f and 39g, if the newly-entered "PLUSCODE™" number conflicts with an existing "PLUSCODE™" number, a screen such as FIG. 601 is displayed which shows such data as die channel, date, start time and stop time of both die new setting and die existing setting (step 27517). The microprocessor controller 31 then waits for the user to press die CANCEL key (steps 27518 and 27519). If the "CANCEL" is entered, the new "PLUSCODE™" number is erased and die VCR Plus+™ operation is re-started (by going back to step 2753). A timer is kept in me VCR. Whenever the timer is empty, the microprocessor controller 31 puts die starting time of the first "PLUSCODE™" number entry (if one exists) into me timer. When e timer equals to die time-of-day clock, the microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted, which will then execute die Recording Procedure described above. Libr r In the specific embodiment of die present invention, a user is given die option to create a library of the direαories for a sα of selected tapes. Storage space is created in die RAM 33 for storing the library. The storage space of the library is divided into more than one group of entries, each for storing the directory of a tape (or a volume). A volume ID of the corresponding tape is stored in a predαermined location of each entry. The library option is initiated when the "LIBRARY" key is pressed. The key can be pressed at anytime, such as when die user is recording a broadcast program or watching a recorded program from a cassette. Moreover, the key can be pressed when tiiere is no cassette in the VCR. Refer to FIG. 59h, when the microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted by die LIBRARY key (step 2771), it displays a screen such as FIG. 60o to prompt the user to enter one of two options (step 2772). Option 1 is an option to add a tape directory into die library, it can be selected only when a enhanced cassette is loaded in the VCR (step 2773) . Option 2 is an option which allows the user to access content of the library and is typically selected by die user to search for a special program or a special type of program (step 2774). With reference to FIG. 59i. When Option 1 is selected, die microprocessor controller 31 dαects whether a cassette is loaded in the VCR (step 2775). If no cassette is loaded, d e microprocessor controller 31 displays a message, such as: "THIS OPTION NEEDS AN INDEXED TAPE" on the screen and returns to step 2772 of FIG. 59h. If an enhanced cassette is loaded in die VCR, d e microprocessor controller 31 will allocate space in die library area for adding die directory (step 2776). In one implementation, the microprocessor controller 31 then prompts the user to enter an volume label. In a preferred implementation, a Volume Number Counter 1016 is kept in the RAM 33, (e.g. inside die operation flags area). This counter 1016 stores the next volume number to be assigned to a newly-added tape. When execution of the add option begins, die microprocessor controller 31 takes the next volume number (assuming for purposes of illustration that it is 59) from the Volume Number Counter and assigns this volume number to die tape. Advantageously, if die library is implemented in such a way that each directory has a fixed amount of memory space, the volume number of a tape can be used as index to address die corresponding directory from the library. In step 2777, the assigned volume number is displayed on die screen, accompanied by a message such as: "THE VOLUME NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THIS TAPE IS 59" "PLEASE AFFIX LABEL TO CASSETTE WITH THIS NUMBER" For convenience, numbered stickers are provided from cassette manufactures and packaged widi a new cassette. The user can then use die appropriate sticker(s) to label the cassette and/or its case. The microprocessor controller 31 then stores die assigned volume number into a predαermined location (VOL ID) of the cassette's direαory (step 2778). The VOL ID field in a directory can be used as an indication to die microprocessor controller 31 that such directory is stored in die library, so that die library can be updated if die directory is changed (e.g. when a recording is performed). The microprocessor controller 31 then writes the directory into the allocated library area (step 2779) and increments the volume number counter as the directory is successfully added to die library. When Option 2 is seleαed at step 2774 and referring now to FIG. 59j, a screen such as FIG. 60p is displayed (step 27710). The user is given three options. Under die first option of FIG. 60p, the user can search for programs with specific program titles or subtitles (for example, programs which have a title containing the word "Yankee" or which has a letter "Z", "CA", αc.) (step 27711). Under the second option of FIG. 60p, the user can search a specific type of programs (e.g. a sports program) (step 27717). Under the tiiird option of FIG. 60p, the user can display d e directory of a particular tape volume (step 27723). When option 1 of FIG. 60p is seleαed, the microprocessor controller 31 prompts the user for the search parameters by displaying die following message on the screen: "PLEASE ENTER THE SEARCH TITLE/CHARACTERS" Upon receiving the input, die microprocessor controller 31 searches through the directories of die library (step 27712). For each entry that matches the search request (step 27713), die microprocessor controller 31 displays die entry's program title and volume number (step 27714). The entry's volume number and program number within die direαory are stored in a search buffer. The microprocessor controller 31 retrieves the next entry (step 27715) until it finishes (step 27716) When option 2 of FIG. 60p is seleαed, the microprocessor controller 31 prompts the user for search parameters by displaying die following message on die screen: "PLEASE ENTER THE TYPE OF PROGRAMS FOR THE SEARCH" Advantageously, if die user does not remember the type classification, he can press a HELP key and all die available types are listed on the screen. When the user enters the type, the microprocessor controller 31 searches through die directories of die library. For each entry which matches the search request (step 27719), the microprocessor controller 31 displays die entry's program title and volume number (step 27720). The entry's volume number and program number are stored in a search buffer. The microprocessor controller 31 retrieves the next entry (step 27721) until it finishes (step 27722). Option 1 and option 2 can be combined. When an option is finished, die user can press the "C" key before he selects the next option. The microprocessor controller 31, in response to such key sequence, performs the search using die content in the search buffer, removing from the search buffer tiiose entries that do not match the paramαers of die second search. For example, if the first search is for sports programs and results in filling die search buffer with address of entries that have a program type of "sports". If the user then press die "C" key and dien selects option (1) to search of the word "YANKEE" in the program tides, die entries stored in die search buffer that do not have die word "Yankee" in die program title field are deleted. The user can continue die search for several times. When the second search is completed, the entries that remain in die search buffer are displayed. When option 3 of FIG. 60p is seleαed, the microprocessor controller 31 prompts the user for die volume number by displaying die following message on the screen: "PLEASE ENTER THE VOLUME NUMBER" When the volume number is entered, die microprocessor controller 31 uses die volume number as index to retrieve the corresponding direαory (step 27724). When die directory is retrieved, its entries are displayed on die screen (step 27725). Auxiliary Information The VBI can be utilized to provide other functions to further enhance operation of a VCR. For example, in one specific implementation of the present invention, the VBI is used to transmit auxiliary information relating to a program being broadcasted. One example of the auxiliary information is the channel-date-time-lengtii (CDTL) information or "PLUSCODE™" number information of a related program. Another example of the auxiliary information is ordering information and/or more detail description of a produα shown in a commercial. The use of die auxiliary information is now illustrated wid reference to FIG. 62. Assume that a network 3201 is broadcasting a prime time movie. At certain intermissions of the movie, die network introduces an upcoming program (e.g. a miniseries). Assuming that the upcoming show will be broadcasted for three consecutive days starting two weeks later (say, January 1) and will be broadcast at 9:00 pm for two hours each day. Normally, exceφts of miniseries are shown during die intermissions. When the exceφts 3202 are broadcasted, die VBI 3203 of die broadcasted signals would contain die CDTL or "PLUSCODE™" number information of the miniseries. The CDTL information or die "PLUSCODE™" number can be put, for example, in the composite packα- 1 (i.e. line 21, field 2, control code=01, type code=0C). A mark, such as a charaαer "I" 3204 flashing at the lower right hand corner of the screen 3205, is shown when d e exceφts are shown. The flashing "I" 3204 informs a user that, if die user is interested in recording d e miniseries, he can press an I-key and die VCR will be automatically set to record die miniseries using die information broadcasted in the VBI. The VCR indicates to the user d at die information has been stored by eidier stopping die flashing of die "I" or by displaying a message, such as "SAVED" on die screen. Other prompts and die variations in die timing relationship with die program may be used as described above for auxiliary information. Referring to the flow chart of FIG. 59m, the microprocessor controller 31, upon interruption by the I-key (step 2781), executes die VBI Decode procedure to set the VBI decoder to decode die VBI (step 2782). When die VBI decoder detects VBI line 21, field 2, it interrupts the microprocessor controller 31. When the microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted (step 2783), it receives die VBI data (step 2784). Since the I-key was pressed, die microprocessor controller checks to see if the control code is equal to 01 and d e type code is equal to 0C (step 2785). If so, die VBI decoder output is converted into CDTL data and stored into the CDTL buffer (step 2786). As another example of the use of die VBI, assume an advertizer would like to present 30 minutes of commercial, including one minute of introductory information and 29 minutes of auxiliary information (e.g. such as ordering instruαions) to die audience. While prime time airing may be more effeαive, its cost is usually high. The present invention allows the advertiser to air the one minute of introductory information at prime time, but provides easy access of die auxiliary information at a less expensive time slot. In the specific implementation of the present invention, die CDTL of the less expensive time slot in which the auxiliary information will be shown is broadcasted in d e VBI. When die introductory information is aired at prime time, a flashing "E" is shown on d e screen. Responsive to the flashing "E", an interested user can press die E-key and die VCR will be automatically sα to record die auxiliary information in the RAM. At a later time, the user can retrieve the auxiliary information and display it on die television. Referring to the flow chart of FIG. 59n, the microprocessor controller 31, upon interruption by the E-key (step 2787), executes die VBI Decode procedure to sα die VBI decoder 60a to decode die VBI (step 2788). When the VBI decoder 60a detects VBI line 21 field 2, it interrupts the microprocessor controller 31. When the microprocessor controller 31 is interrupted (step 2789), it receives die VBI data (step 27810). Since die E-key was received, the microprocessor controller 31 checks to see if the control code is equal to 01 and the type code is equal to OC (step 27811). If so, the VBI decoder output is stored into die RAM 33 (step 27812). In one implementation, die text information is put in the composite packets 1 and/or 2 of line 21, field 2 of die VBI. In anodier implementation, me text information is put in the composite packα 1. However, when the text is too long for the packα, a pointer is sα in composite packα 2 pointing to die location of the other parts of the text. Timer Programming Timer programming allows a show to be recorded on any channel at a later time using the traditional recording features built into the video player. Before programming the VCR widi its traditional programming funαions, die direαory information can be used to set die tape at a specific blank segment. This is accomplished by entering the number corresponding to die blank space and d en pressing the "STOP" key. After die user enters the segment number, he can also wait for a time-out, the effects of which is the same as though die STOP key is pressed. In response to the key sequences, die microprocessor controller 31 sets the VCR to rewind or fast forward die tape to the seleαed position. The user can then sα die VCR to conventional timer recording. Erasing Programs From The Tape A program can be erased by delαing its entry from the directory. When die tape direαory is displayed on die screen, die user can enter die number of the program to be erased and dien presses "ERASE" . The key sequence causes the microprocessor controller 31 to display a screen as shown in FIG. 60m. A confirmation screen, such as die one shown in FIG. 60n is displayed whereby the user is asked to confirm the erasure. The user can press "ENTER" to confirm the erasure or "CANCEL" to cancel die erasure. After the program entry is deleted from the direαory, die word "BLANK" is filled into the title field. If the newly erased program is preceded and/or followed by a blank segment, the lengdi of tiiis segment will be merged into die newly created blank segment, and die corresponding entry or entries will be merged into one. Positioning The Tape From the directory screen, die position of die tape can be sα in several ways. One way is to enter the number corresponding to die desired position of the tape and dien press "STOP". Anodier way is to enter die number corresponding to die desired position of the tape. If no input is made in a predαermined time interval (e.g. 5 seconds), a timeout will occur and die results are die same as if the user has pressed "STOP". The words "XX STOP" will be displayed on die screen next to the word "COMMAND:". The words "MOVING TO XX" are also displayed (where XX is die number of the selected program). The tape will either rewind or fast forward, depending upon its current position relative die seleαed position. If die tape is already at die seleαed position, only die word "XX STOP" will be displayed. Editing A Program Title The tide of a recorded program can be edited under die directory screen. To edit a program title, the corresponding number of the program is first entered and die "EDIT" key is then pressed. An edit screen, such as FIG. 60o is displayed, in which the titie of the selected program is displayed at die top of the edit screen. Underneath the titie are a cursor (represented by a " + " sign) and one or more underscore characters representing the new titie. The cursor can be moved backward witiiin die title by pressing die "REWIND" key and forward by pressing the "FF" key. A character in the titie can be changed by pressing a key such as die "CH UP" key to scroll the current character forward, for example, from "R" to "S", then to "T", or by pressing a key such as the "CH DN" key to scroll the current charaαer backward, for example, from "Q" to "P" and dien to "O". A blank space can be inserted into die titie at die cursor position by pressing the "ERASE" key. A charaαer or a charaαer can be deleted from the titie by pressing the " " key. When die editing is complαe, the "ENTER" key can be pressed so diat die new titie is stored. After the "ENTER" key is pressed, d e directory screen is re-displayed and die new titie is displayed in the corresponding entry. To cancel any changes in the program titie, die "CANCEL" key can be pressed, whereby die directory screen re-appears and die title of the corresponding program remain unchanged. RECORDING EXTENSION When the VCR is recording a program, there is a possibility that duration of die program may be extended. One obvious example is when the broadcast program is a sports event (e.g. a football game) which goes into overtime. According to one optional improvement of the present invention, when die time of recording, as sα by die user, is reached, die VBI is checked to see if die show is extended. The check can be performed in several ways. By way of example, refer to FIG. 63, when the VCR is recording a program as sα, the content of die program title field in die VBI is registered by die microprocessor controller 31 (step 4301). The program title of the program being received is retrieved from the VBI at predefined time intervals (e.g. 15 minutes) (step 4302) and compared against the titie previously registered (step 4303). If die scheduled termination time of recording is reached and if d e titie received from the VBI is not die same as the registered titie (step 4304), recording is terminated (step 4305). Otherwise recording continues. In anodier implementation, a special code, used for representing whether a show is extended is added to the VBI along with the newly scheduled ending time. These data can dien be monitored to dαeα an extension of die program being recorded. In yα anodier implementation, die VCR constantly monitors die program I.D. which contains die program length. The broadcaster updates the program length which die VCR d en uses to automatically extend die recording. Advantageously, die user is provided widi a option of whether to use die extension feature. Most modern video players provides a user with an option of seleαing a tape speed for recording and playing operations. The speed commonly provided are Standard Play (SP), Long Play (LP) and Super Long Play (SLP). A higher speed may provide better recording quality but uses up more tape space. According to anodier feature of the present invention, the recording speed of die VCR is automatically changed to a lower value when the lengdi of die recording space is less man the lengdi of die desired program. Specifically, when a recording is assigned to a designated tape location, a dαermination is made on die lengths which the assigned space can record under different speed, as follows: Length of selected segment/speed(SP) = available time(SP) Length of selected segment speed(LP) = available time(LP) Length of selected segment/speed(SLP) = available time(SLP) Recording of a program will then be performed in a speed at which d e available time is greater than the specified time of recording. If more than one speed is possible, die user is notified and allowed to seleα die speed of recording. Under anodier implementation, the highest speed in which complαe recording is possible is automatically seleαed so as to achieve the best recording quality. In another optional implementation, a list of the available blank segments is displayed and die user can then seleα the segment he wants for recording a program. Parental Control FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the steps employed in die operation of the parental control feature of the indexing VCR. Because programs may be broadcasted diat parents do not want their children to view or record, die indexing VCR 10 uses the program category information in the VBI to institute a Parental Control Program for screening out program categories not deemed desirable for die children in die household. The program category may include categories, such as adult shows, diat parents do not want their children to view or record. By seleαing these categories, the indexing VCR 10 prevents children from viewing or recording diese shows. Alternatively, the program category may be recorded in the VBI of a prerecorded tape which when seleαed by parental control prevents the tape from being played in the VCR. Alternatively, die TTD of the PR tape may be flagged in die RAM 33 as being restricted. During a sα up mode of die indexing VCR, die user may impose parental control to prevent a viewer from watching or recording particular television programs or a seleαed channel. This mode may be entered by seleαing from a menu display on die screen 50a, or, alternatively, by pressing a Parental Control Key on the remote controller. As part of the initial sα up of die indexing VCR 10, die parent sets a unique password to allow access to setting parental control commands. When die user presses the Parental Control Key and enters die correα password, die indexing VCR 10 displays a list of categories. As the user scrolls dirough die list, d e indexing VCR 10 highlights the seleαion. By pressing the Parental Control key, the user toggles die category as being restriαed (i.e. under parental control) or unrestriαed. A restriαed program requires the user to enter a password to gain access to the program. Referring in particular to FIG. 64, the indexing VCR periodically monitors the program being viewed or recorded to prevent access to the restriαed categories of shows. The microprocessor controller 31 periodically reads the category code in die program I.D. (step 9802) and compares it to the stored parental control category list. If there is not a match between the category of the program being watched or recorded and die restriαed list, the VCR returns to step 9802 to continue monitoring the VBI (step 9804). Otherwise, if die category is restriαed, die VCR checks to see if the password flag allows access to die program (step 9806). The password flag is set when die proper password is entered by die user. If the flag allows access, die VCR returns to step 9802 to continue monitoring the VBI (step 9806). The compare between the program being viewed and die parental control flag is done periodically, for example every minute, to prevent long periods of unauthorized viewing before the next comparison. If die program is restriαed, die microprocessor controller 31 stops and disables die VCR (step 9808) and displays on the screen 50a die message "parental control: please enter password to resα" (step 9810). The microprocessor controller 31 ignores VCR control commands and channel number commands. The VCR continuously requests the password to be entered until a proper password is entered (step 9812). Alternatively, the VCR may allow a fixed number of incorreα passwords before ignoring all passwords for a predetermined time. When the correα password has been entered, die VCR restores control to die user (step 9814) and sets the password flag (step 9816). Setting the password flag allows die authorized viewer to continue watching the show or recording it widiout being periodically interrupted for a password request. In an alternate embodiment, the controller 31 allows the user to select channels other than those that are forbidden. Alternatively, different passwords allow television shows to be blocked for some viewers such as children under age 13 but allows others, such as children above age 13, to view the shows, while restriαing the children above age 13 from watching another show. Specific Implementation FIGs. 65a-651' are schematic views of displays according to a specific implementation of the invention. A new blank tape is prepared for indexing by inserting the blank tape into the VCR and pressing the index button 9712 on die remote controller 9700. By using the cursor buttons 9725, die user highlights "Blank Tape" on die screen shown in FIG. 67k' and presses die enter button 9709 and selects new tape from the menu (FIG. 67a). The microprocessor controller 31 displays die display shown in FIG. 67b and prompts the user to enter die lengdi of die tape. Using the keypad 9708 die user enters the lengdi of die tape, e.g. 120 is entered for a 2 hour tape. The user presses die enter button 9709 if he has entered die correct time in minutes or the cancel button 9706 if he has made an error and dien reenters the correα number. When the tape is ejeαed, die microprocessor controller 31 displays die tape number and requests the user mark the housing as shown in FIG. 67c-d. When recording eidier in conjunction widi VCRPlus+™, on-screen time programming or instant programming using the indexing VCR, die VCR reads the program identification from the VBI. If no program titie is being broadcasted, the microprocessor uses the date, time, and channel of die program as the titie. When recording a program, die indexing VCR informs the user whether sufficient space is available on time for the recording. The user first inserts the tape into the VCR and programs the VCR to record a program. The user en presses die review button 9714 and reads the display shown in FIG. 67e as to whether the tape has sufficient capacity. If the user is recording using instant recording (i.e. recording at diat moment by pressing the record button 9718), he first presses the index button 9712 to get a program direαory as shown in FIG. 67g. The current location on the tape is marked by an arrow. If the user wants to move to a different location on die tape, he uses die cursor keys 9725 and die record button 9718 to change d e location. The user is prompted to enter the lengdi of die program to be recorded (FIG. 67f). If sufficient blank space is available at die location on the tape, the VCR begins to record for die specified time. Otherwise, a warning is displayed (FIG. 67i). Pressing the enter button 9709 overrides d e warning. Pressing the cancel button 9706 cancels the recording request. An indexed tape is viewed by inserting the tape into the VCR and pressing the index button 9712. A directory is displayed (FIG. 67i) and die user makes a seleαion by highlighting die desired program using the cursor keys 9725 and pressing the play button 9717. The VCR dien fast forwards or rewinds to die highlighted program. Alternatively, an arrow in reverse video pointing to die destination program may be displayed on die directory during die search. The arrow on the directory moves according to the location on d e tape and die seleαed program is played automatically. During play, the directory can be viewed by pressing the index button 9712. A program may be erased from tape by pressing the index button 9712 and using die cursor to highlight the program to be erased (FIG. 67i). The erase button 9715 is pressed, and, as shown in FIG. 67i, the user presses the enter button 9709 to confirm the erasure or the cancel button 9706 to cancel the request. Once enter is pressed, die title in die directory is replaced with "BLANK." If two consecutive blank periods occur after the erasure, the microprocessor controller 31 combines them into one entry in the directory. The program is not actually erased from the tape, but only removed from the directory. A program titie is edited by pressing the index button 9712 and highlighting die titie of the program to be changed (FIG. 67k). The edit button 9713 is pressed and using the cursor keys 9725 the titie is changed (FIG. 671) and d e new titie entered by pressing the enter button 9709. Pressing the cancel button 9706 cancels the new title. A program is searched in the library with or widiout a tape in the VCR by pressing the library button 9710 and seleαing search using the cursor keys 9725 and the enter button 9709 (FIG. 67m). Highlighting program list and pressing the enter button 9709 allows a search by program titie (FIG. 67n). Using the cursor keys 9725 and die enter button 9709 to seleα the first letter of the program titie, a list of program titles starting with die letter seleαed is displayed. (FIG. 67o) The page up button 9704 and die page down button 9705 are used to review die list of program titles (FIG. 67p). Highlighting tape list and pressing the enter button 9709 allows the user to search by tape number (FIG. 67q). The keypad 9708 and die enter button 9709 are used to seleα die tape number to be searched (FIG. 67r) and displayed (FIG. 67s). Highlighting category and pressing the enter key 9709 allows searches by category (FIG. 671). The cursor keys 9725 are used to seleα the category (FIG. 67u-v) and die page up button 9704 and die page down button 9705 are used to review die list of program titles in die selected category (FIG. 67w). A tape may be delαed from the library or die RAM 33 by pressing the library button 9710 and seleαing using the cursor keys 9725 and die enter button 9709 registration from the menu of FIG. 67x and delαe from the subsequent menu of FIG. 67y. The user then enters the tape number assigned to the tape to be deleted (FIG. 67z). The user may review the program before erasing it from the directory. By pressing die enter button 9709, d e microprocessor controller 31 erases the tape number from the RAM 33 (FIG. 67a'). In the preferred embodiment, the program is not erased from the tape, but only the index of it is erased from the RAM 33. When a tape is loaned to a friend, die directory is downloaded from the VBI at the end of die tape into the RAM 33 by pressing the library button 9710 and selecting, using die cursor keys 9725 and die enter button 9709, download from the menu on the screen shown in FIGs. 65b', c', d'. A person may adopt a tape indexed in another's VCR by adding die contents of the new tape to die RAM 33 of their VCR. The tape is inserted into die VCR and die library button 9710 is pressed. Using the cursor keys 9725 and die enter button 9709, die user selects registration from the screen shown in FIG. 67e' and selects add from the subsequent screen shown in FIG. 67f . The VCR reads die direαory from the VBI at die end of die tape. The microprocessor controller 31 assigns a new tape number which is displayed on the screen. This adopt feature may also be used to add die directory from a PR tape to the RAM 33. Tape identification numbers may be changed by pressing the library button 9710 and using die cursor keys 9725 to highlight registration as shown in FIG. 67g'. The cursor keys are then used to seleα Change from the display shown in FIG. 67h'. Using the keypad 9708 die user can change die tape number (FIG. 67i'). Overwriting of numbers previously used is avoided (FIG. 67j'). This number is preferably changed before recording die program. This feature is useful when multiple tapes are required for a single show, such as a 3 part mini-series at is recorded on different tapes. Tapes may be retroaαively indexed by seleαing rαroindex in FIG. 671' and following the steps of FIG. 58. By pressing the "i" button 9721 in response to a flashing icon on the TV screen such as a flashing "i," the user is able to obtain additional information on products or services offered in TV commercials or on regular programs. This additional information may be detailed weather, traffic, sport scores, or financial information. Pressing the "i" button 9721 automatically programs the VCR using die "PLUSCODE™" numbers by transferring the numbers from temporary RAM to non-volatile RAM. By pressing the "R" button, die user can later review and manipulate a directory of die text information stored. The cursor buttons 9725 and die enter button 9709 are used to seleα information. The user may identify die program while he is viewing a current broadcast or a recorded program by pressing die PGM ID button 9724 which then displays the program titie, its length, die day and date of die broadcast (or recording) and die station name or call letters as shown in FIG. 67h. If a program is being recorded diat overruns its scheduled time (e.g. a sporting event), me VCR automatically extends die recording time of the preprogrammed recordings for programs broadcasted by a TV station that participates in broadcasting program identification. The TV station broadcasts changes in programming which are dαected by the VCR. When a printer is conneαed to die VCR, the user can press die "R" button 9722 to recall the particular information text, such as a coupon, onto the TV screen. The user dien presses die print button 9702 to print the information on the printer. Various methods of combining steps of key strokes may be used. For example, pressing the "i" button twice in rapid succession may be used to review information stored. Pressing the "i" button three times in rapid succession may be used to cancel a seleαion. Copying of Prerecorded Tapes In a first method, a master tape is made of die prerecorded tape. The destination, targα, or slave tape is a blank tape on which the information on the master tape is to be copied. In a manner well known in the art, the master tape is placed in physical contaα with die slave tape, along its entire length, and a copy is made by applying me suitable magnαic fields. This allows all information from the master tape to be copied on die slave tape. In a second method, a copying system comprises a master VCR and a plurality of slave VCRs for copying information from a master tape to a plurality of slave tapes. The master VCR is an indexing VCR identical to that described above. The master VCR provides video signals representative of die video signals detected from the master tape. Because the indexing VCR does not normally provide control track signals, odier than sync pulses, from its video output, die master VCR is an indexing VCR 10 diat is modified to include an internal VISS sensor circuit for providing an indexing signal to die slave VCR in response to a dαeαed VISS mark on the control track of the master tape. The plurality of slave VCRs record die video signals provided from die master VCR. In addition, die index signal is provided to each slave VCR, which, in response thereto, writes a VISS mark on a control track of the slave tape. Camcorder Applications In an alternate embodiment, a camcorder which is a portable video tape recorder for recording video images received dirough a lens has a microphone for recording voice and audio track. A clock in the camcorder records a date/time stamp on the tape along with the recorded voice information. The voice information is preferably an announcement by me user of die titie of the particular scene he is about to shoot. When the tape is played in the indexing VCR, die voice announcements are read and digitized and stored in the RAM together with die date/time stamp. Later, the user can cursor down on d e directory screen to die desired date time entry and die digitized voice announcement is then recalled from the SRAM memory. The user can create a directory by titie by changing the titie from the date/time stamp entry with the corresponding digitized voice announcement to an alpha numeric tide in a manner similar to that described in conneαion widi FIG. 60. Alternatively, die camcorder could incorporate the features of recording directory information by using a directory input/output keyboard and display device 32 diat is eidier attachable to or entered along with die camcorder. However, because die user is usually occupied when using the camcorder, he does not have time to enter the title by this method at the time of filming. Automatic Time Setting Because broadcast stations broadcast die date and time as part of the Extended Data Services on Line 21 field 2 of the VBI, this information can be captured by the indexing VCR 10 to sα die clock automatically and periodically. Even summer time can be sα automatically. The indexing VCR 10 constantly monitors line 21 field 2 of die VBI for die date and time broadcasted therein. Alternatively, the monitoring does not have to be constant, but can be done periodically, such as once a day, once a week, or once a month. The indexing VCR 10 dien resets its date and time clock to correspond to d e broadcasted time. The indexing VCR 10 also dαects power interruptions. After die occurrence of a power interruption, the indexing VCR 10 also resets the clock. Automatic Mute When Index Kev Is Pressed When die Index key is pressed, die microprocessor controller transmits a mute command to d e television to shut off the volume. This prevents the user from hearing the hissing when the tape is being fast-forwarded or rewound which the user otherwise find annoying. When the user transmits a play command or when the indexing VCR 10 stops its search, the indexing VCR 10 transmits an override to die mute command to turn the volume of the television back on. Chain Commands When seleαing programs for viewing from a directory, die user may chain commands by concatenating the seleαions and entering the command. For example, if the tape is a Karaoke tape, he may want to play song number 2, 7, and 4 in sequence. The user enters die command by pressing the 0, 2, 0, 7, 0, 4 buttons and dien die Play button. In response thereto, the indexing VCR 10 plays program 2, program 7 and dien program 4. Exterior Magnαic Strip In two other specific embodiments, directory information are recorded on a secondary memory carried by d e cassette. The secondary memory can be a magnetic strip carried on die exterior of die cassette housing. In one such embodiment, the content of die magnαic strip is read/written by a magnetic head diat is stationary. In anodier such embodiment, die magnαic strip is read/written by a magnαic head diat is movable over the magnαic track(s) on the strip. Movable Head Instead of a stationary head, directory information or the tape identification number may be read/written by a magnαic head which can move over a magnetic strip 150 on the cassette housing, as shown in die recording system of FIG. 66. The recording system of FIG. 66 is similar to the recording system of FIG. 1 with d e exceptions that a movable head assembly 155 in which a magnαic sensor 154 is coupled to a transport mechanism 156 so that it can move along a line parallel to track(s) on the magnαic strip 150. Refer to FIG. 66b. The movable head assembly 155 comprises a magnαic head/sensor 154 affixed to a head assembly 156, a drive screw 157, and a guide beam 26112. Two holes are provided in the magnαic head assembly 156. The first hole has spiral grooves for coupling die threads of die drive screw 157 as depiαed in FIG. 66d. The second hole has an axis parallel to the first hole and is provided for die guide beam 26112 to pass through. The drive screw 157 is coupled to a motor 159. As the motor 159 rotates, the drive screw 157 also rotates. Because rotation freedom of the head assembly 156 is restriαed by die guide beam 26112 which passes through the second hole, as die drive screw 157 rotates, die head assembly 156 is pushed along a line parallel to the drive screw 157 and die guide beam 26112. The direαion of die movement is dependent upon the direαion of rotation of the motor 159. The guide beam 26112 also serves to maintain a fixed distance between the magnαic sensor and the magnetic strip. The head assembly 156 has a spring 26115 disposed in such a way that it exerts, using die guide beam as a fulcrum, a force pushing die head assembly 156 against the drive screw 157 to ensure that the grooves in the first hole would always engage with die threads of the drive screw 157 even if die drive screw 157 is not straight. The magnαic sensor in die specific embodiment is a magnetic head of model number SK- 12426 from Nortronics, Dassel, Minnesota. The motor in die specific embodiment is a D.C. motor with part number FK-130RH from Mabuchi. Operation of the motor 159 is controlled by a control circuit 2610 schematically illustrated in FIG. 67. Movement of the head assembly 156 is dependent upon die rotational speed of the motor 159 which in turn is dependent upon die voltage output from circuit 2611 of the circuit 2610. This voltage can be adjusted by changing die variable resistor witiiin the circuit 2611. Operation of the motor 2624 is controlled by a stop/go signal applied to die input of circuit 2612 of the circuit 2610. When a high voltage level signal is applied at d e input of block 2612, a transistor 2612a conducts which dien turns on a transistor 2612b and provides a conduction path from the motor. Direαion of movement of die magnαic head is controlled by a signal applied to die input of circuit 2610. When die input signal is low (FWD), both transistors 2613 and 2614 are shutoff. When transistor 2613 shuts off, transistor 2615 conducts, which dien turns on transistor 2616 and diereby shuts off transistor 2618. When transistor 2615 conducts, it also shuts off transistor 2617 and thereby turns on transistor 2623. On die odier hand, when transistor 2614 is shutoff, it causes transistor 2619 to shutoff and transistor 2620 to turn on. When transistor 2620 turns on, it causes transistor 2622 to shut off. Thus, a current passes from Vm (circuit 2611) dirough transistor 2621 into die right-hand side of d e motor and exits 2624 from its left-hand side dirough transistor 2623, causing the motor 2624 to rotate in one direαion. Similarly, when the input signal is high (REV), a current is passed through die motor 2624 in a left-to-right direαion, causing die motor 2624 to rotate in the opposite direαion. Data is written onto the magnαic strip by a write circuit 2630 schematically illustrated in FIG. 68. The write circuit 2630 comprises a first amplifier circuit 2631 for amplifying die input signal. The amplifier circuit 2631 has an R-C feedback for improving response. A block 2632 is a second amplifier circuit coupled to die first amplifier circuit through a variable resistor 2638. The variable resistor 2638 is provided to adjust d e magnitude of the write current. The output of the second amplifier circuit 2632 drives a current source circuit 2633. The current source circuit 2633 has two capacitors 2634, 2635. When the input voltage to the circuit 2633 changes, diese capacitors help to pull/push die voltage received at die respeαive inputs of transistors 2636, 2637, diereby improving the response time of the circuit. The four diodes witiiin the circuit 2633 are provided to equalize die base voltage of the transistors 2636, 2637. When data is applied to the input of circuit 2630, it causes the current source 2633 to output a current through write winding 2640 of a write head 16 when enabled dirough a transistor 2641 and a switch 2642. Depending on die value of die write enable signal, die current from the current source 2633 flows to the write head 16 to cause magnetization of the magnetic strip 150. The direction of magnαization is dependent upon die direαion of die current from the current source 2633, which in turn is dependent upon die voltage level of the data input. Data recorded on d e magnαic strip 150 can be read by a read circuit implemented in accordance wid read circuits commonly known to the art. FIG. 69 is a schematic circuit diagram of an exemplary read circuit. The figure shows a peak dαection circuit 2650 coupled to die magnetic sensor 154 for reading signals recorded on die magnetic strip 150. Signals produced by die magnαic sensor 154 are inputted into a differential band amplifier 2651. Each side of die differential amplifier 2561 has a capacitor for adjusting die pass band for die input signal. Amplification of the circuit 2651 is adjustable by a variable resistor 2658. The differential outputs from the differential amplifier 2651 are received by a second amplifier 2652 which converts them to a single-ended output. The output from amplifier 2652 is received by a differentiator circuit 2653 which operates to detect the peaks of the signals from die magnαic sensor 154. The output of the differentiator circuit 2653 is applied to a digital buffer 2654. The output from the amplifier 2652 is also received by a circuit 2655 which converts negative portions of the output signals into positive value. In other words, the circuit 2655 outputs die absolute value of signal received from the circuit 2652. The circuit provides an envelope from which level change of the sensed signal is dαeαed. The output from the circuit 2655 is symmetrically adjusted by a symmetry circuit 2656. The output of die symmetry circuit 2656 is applied to a mask circuit 2657 which masks off signals that are lower than a predαermined value. The output from the circuit 2657 is applied to die enable input of the digital buffer 2654 to enable signals from die circuit 2653 to be registered by die buffer 2654. One advantage of a movable head is that directory information on the strip can be updated widiout requiring a movement of the cassette, and can therefore be performed more freely and frequently, such as at each time when the directory information is changed. As a result, the direαory information can be preserved even when power to the recorder is lost before die cassette is ejeαed. Moreover, if one attempt to read/write data from the magnαic strip fails, other attempts can be made. Furthermore, after a write operation, accuracy of the data can be confirmed by performing a subsequent read operation. Another advantage of using a movable head is diat directory information can be recorded at lower bit density. For example, if the magnαic strip is placed on die long edge (back) of the cassette, it can have a recording lengdi of about four to five inches and die directory information can then be recorded at a bit density of between 500 to 600 bits per inch (BPI). Furthermore, if a two-track magnαic head is used for the same total data capacity, the record density can be further reduced to between 250 and 300 BPI. Anodier advantage of a movable head is that since movement of the magnαic head is under a control logic separate from the motor and mechanical control logic, its speed and speed variation can be better controlled. After a video cassette is inserted into a VCR, it is solidly clamped inside die VCR. Therefore, another advantage of a movable head is diat, unlike d e stationary head which requires movement of the cassette, die movable head can read directory information from the magnαic strip when the cassette is settled. The track position thus becomes more accurately reproducible and hence alignment of read/write tracks is more easily attainable. Another advantage of die movable head approach is that, in contrast to the stationary head approach where read operation is performed in one direαion (i.e. when die tape cassette is inserted) and write operation is performed in an opposite direαion (i.e. when die tape cassette is ejeαed), read and write operations with a movable head can be performed in die same direction, thus providing better data reliability. Referring to FIG. 70a, in the specific embodiment of die present invention, directory data are recorded on a magnαic strip 3650 affixed to die back wall 3651 of a cassette. The strip 3650 is a tape with part number 8156 from 3M Corporation. Construαion of the magnαic strip is illustrated more clearly in FIG. 70b. The magnetic strip has a magnαic area of 0.4 inch wide to provide two recording tracks 3652 each of which has a width of approximately 0.12 inch and a length of 4.9 inch. The center-to-center separation between the two tracks is approximately 0.14 inch. The strip 3650 has a plastic base 3654 approximately .825 inch wide and 5.9 inch long. A foam adhesive tape 3655 of 0.015 inch thick is used to adhere die base to the cassette (see FIG. 70c). Advantageously, a mark hereinafter referred to as die "feature control mark", is provided on die cassette or on the magnetic strip for enabling die VCR to perform predefined funαions, such as one or more of the enhanced funαions described hereinbelow. One implementation of me feature control mark is to have a mark 150 made of light-reactive material so that it is recognizable by a device 159 such as a photo-diode on die recorder. Anodier implementation of the feature control mark is to pre-record or pre-format a predefined bit pattern (for example, a bit string of " 101010") at a predαermined location (hereinafter referred to as the "header") of die magnαic strip. When the cassette is loaded into die VCR, die directory controller first reads die bit pattern from the header area. The bit pattern is read into die feature control field FTCNTL 1013 (FIG. 2) of die RAM 33 which is used to enable predefined functions of the VCR. It will be understood diat die bit pattern may be modified as new models of VCR, widi different funαions or enhancements, are introduced. The bit pattern on the magnαic strip can be pre-formatted as part of die manufacturing process of the magnαic strip. One method of pre-formatting the magnetic strip is to first provide a uniform coating of magnαic material along the header as illustrated in FIG. 70e. The coating may be accomplished by such mass produαion methods as offsα printing or roller coating. After the coating is completed, die header is subjeα to a pulsed magnetic field so diat die predefined bit pattern, as shown in FIG. 70f is produced thereon. The disadvantage of tiiis technique is diat die code may be erased or modified, eidier intentionally, or unintentionally especially when the stationary head approach is used, because the position where the head may read/write die strip under tiiis approach is dependent upon mechanism of the VCR and is therefore relatively more difficult to ascertain. Another method of preformatting the feature mark is to seleαively coat portions 3072 of die header which contain a "1" with magnαizable material as shown in FIG. 70g. The portions 3071 of the header which contain a "0" are not coated. The selective coating can be accomplished using a mask of printing plate containing me desired pattern. When the cassette is inserted into me VCR, a write operation is performed on die header. After the write operation is complαed, those portions which are coated widi magnetizable material are magnαized, as shown in FIG. 70h). The header is dien read into FTCNTL 1013 field 1013. FIG. 70i illustrates anodier implementation of die feature control mark. According to this implementation, one or more electrically conductive path is provided on die cassette casing, such as by printing one or more strip 3073 on a designated area with conduαive ink. At each end of die conductive path is a pad 3074. Two electrical contacts 3075 are provided from the VCR such diat when die cassette is seated in die VCR, die two contacts 3075 would press against and contaα the two pads 3074 respeαively. The contacts 3075 are coupled to an electrical circuit 3076 such as die one illustrated in FIG. 70j. If the conductive path 3073 is present on a cassette, the two contacts 3075 are shorted and die output of circuit 3076 is at one voltage level. If a cassette does not have die conductive path, die two contacts are open and die output of the circuit 3076 is at another voltage level. The voltage is read by die microprocessor controller 31 to sα FTCNTL 1013 in the RAM 33. Semiconduαor Memory In anodier implementation, die directory information is stored in a semiconductor memory device as shown in FIG. 71. A semiconductor memory 162 is carried by die cassette. When the cassette is inserted into the VCR, the semiconduαor memory will be connected to the microprocessor controller 31 through contacts 163. Referring to FIG. 72a, there is shown a semiconductor memory 2910 carried on die back panel of die cassette 2920. A plurality of contacts 2930 are provided on die surface of die semiconductor memory device 2910 for coupling to the microprocessor controller 31 of the directory controller 30. Desirably, the number of contacts between the semiconductor memory device and die VCR is minimized. This is accomplished by using a serial memory, such as a EEPROM from Microchip with part number 24C04-P. By using a serial memory, only one bit is required to input/output address and data. According to a specific implementation, the semiconductor memory 2910 is a serial memory and has four pads for coupling to die microprocessor controller 31, as shown in FIG. 72b. The pads include a pad 2930a for coupling to a 5 volt voltage supply, a pad 2930d for coupling to ground, a pad 2930b for communicating serial address/data signals (SDA) and a pad 2930c for inputting a serial clock signal (SCL). To provide appropriate tolerance for possible misalignment due to variance in construαion of different cassettes and tape recorder/players, as well as to provide tolerance between a cassette in tape player/recorder, each of die pads 2930 in the specific implantation is substantially square widi dimensions of about 0.25"x0.25". Center-to-center separation between adjacent pads is about 0.35". The connectors 2940 on the back panel of die VCR for coupling to the semiconductor memory device 2910 are spring-loaded contaα pins so as to allow for movement of the cassette during loading and unloading. Preferably, the springs are chosen such diat tiiey assert about 50 grams onto the cassette and would not cause die cassette to be pushed out of its resting plate. The contaα area of each pin is substantially equal to 0.05"x0.05", with a tolerance of 0.01" for each dimension. As illustrated in FIGs. 72a and 72b, die memory device 2910 is placed in the specific implementation in the recessed label area 2931 on the back panel of die cassettes, which has an area of 0.08"xl.5". In the specific implementation, the thickness of the memory device is 0.062". The separation between the bottom edges of the conductor pads 2930 and the bottom edge of d e memory device 2910 is 0.1". A separation of 0.1" is provided between the left edge of the memory device 2910 and die left edge of die left-most conductor pad 2930a. A separation of 0.1" is provided between the right edge of die memory device 2910 and die right edge of die right-most conductor pad 2930d. In d e specific implementation, the first 64 addressable bits (8 bytes) of the memory device are reserved for housekeeping purposes. Referring to FIG. 73, the first byte 2961 of the housekeeping data is an identification pattern, such as a ASCII character "I", for controlling operation of d e VCR and also information for enabling or disabling certain enhanced funαions of the VCR. Upon being loaded into a VCR, this data will be read into die FNCNTL field in the RAM. The second byte 2962 stores die size of die memory, as a number representing the number of 256-byte segments of die memory. Bit 15 is used to provide a parity check for bits 8 through 14. For example: bitl5 bitδ 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 512 bytes x 8 = 4096 bits 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 16384 bytes x 8 = 131072 bits If, upon reading an invalid bit pattern or a bad parity from bits 8 to 15, the microprocessor controller 31 would perform an autosizing procedure to reestablish the valid memory size. The autosizing procedure is also performed on a new memory. The third and fourth bytes 2963 are used as a pointer to the last byte of the directory. For example, a bit pattern of (MSB) (LSB) 0000 0001 00000011 represents that the last byte of die directory is recorded on die 259th byte of the memory device. The fifth byte 2964 is used for storing the tape label for accessing the library, if such feature is installed in die VCR. Bytes 6 to 8 of the housekeeping data are reserved for future use. Directory data are recorded starting from the 9th byte 2965. The directory consists of various number of records, each storing information of a recorded program on the cassette tape including an index field, a program name and die lengdi of die program. A byte is also provided in each record for storing control information. One bit in the 21st byte is used to represent whether die corresponding program has been overwritten. Two bits in the 21st byte are used to indicate die speed at which die corresponding program is recorded. For example 0 0 : recorded at SP 0 1 : recorded at LP 1 0 : recorded at SLP 1 1 : reserved An eight-bit checksum 2968 is recorded after the last record of die directory for data integrity verification. When the tape in inserted into die VCR, die direαory is read from the semiconductor memory serially and stored in die in-use directory area of the RAM. When the in-use directory in the RAM is changed, as a result of eidier one or more modification to its content or addition deletion of programs recorded on die tape, its content can be written immediately back to die semiconductor memory. In writing the direαory to the semiconductor memory, the microprocessor controller retrieves the content of the in-use directory one byte at a time, shifts the byte to an output register and sends the content of the output register to the semiconductor. Data transfer to the semiconductor memory 2910 is described in die produα specification of die 24C04A from Microchip Technology. FIG. 74 is a pictorial view of a video cassette recorder having a front load mechanism for the tape cassette 40. The recorder 1 has located therein a stationary magnαic read/write head 154 designed to read from and record on die magnetic strip 150 as the cassette 40 is inserted and ejected, respeαively. FIG. 75 is a pictorial view of a video cassette recorder having a top load mechanism for the cassette 40. A stationary magnαic read/write head 154 is positioned in the VCR 1 to read from and record on die magnαic strip 150 as the cassette 40 is respeαively lowered into and ejeαed from die recorder. FIG. 76 is a perspeαive view of a video cassette using a magnαic strip for the VCRs of FIGs. 74-75. Magnαic strips 150 can be manufactured and distributed in stacks 149 as shown in FIG. 77 or in rolls or sheets (not shown) cut to size by die user. As shown in FIG. 76, a standard videocassette 40, such as a VHS type videocassette, comprises a housing 40' having top and bottom walls 200, 202 and four side walls 204, 206, 208, 210. Usually die housing 40' is constraαed as a relatively flat parallelpiped wherein the vertical separation of top and bottom walls 200, 202 is much less than d e widdi or lengdi of die top or bottom walls. The magnαic strip 150 (not shown in FIG. 76) can be placed in an affixation zone 151 on die back wall 204 of the housing, or on the top of die housing 200. Each strip 150 comprises a magnαic recording layer 152 and an adhesive layer 156 for affixation to the zone 151. The magnαic layer 152, by way of example, can be construαed of the same materials as the magnαic tape 42 and may be affixed to any standard tape cassette by the user or pre-attached by die cassette manufacturer. A strip of video tape approximately one-half inch in lengdi and one-half inch wide can be used as layer 152 in the configurations of FIGs. 74-75 to store approximately 4 kilobits of coded digital data. The adhesive layer 156 is applied to die non-magnetic backing of die magnαic layer 152. The adhesive can comprise a pressure-sensitive adhesive, or any of a variety of natural or synthetic organic adhesives suitable for bonding magnαic tape to the housing of a videocassette. In an alternative embodiment, strips 150 are formed widi double-backed tape self-adhesion to zone 151. Thus, the strips 150 can be affixed to any standard cassette, thereby enabling an owner of cassettes to add directory storage capability to any existing cassette. FIG. 78 shows another embodiment of a videocassette having a magnαic strip. A magnαic strip assembly 2100 comprises a magnetic strip 2101, according to tiiis implementation, which is attached to a base, such as a card 2102. The card 2102 preferably has a depressed area 2103 in which die magnetic strip 2101 is placed. The magnαic strip can store several hundred bits of data per inch. A strip of resilient material (not shown) is placed between the card 2102 and die magnetic strip 2101 to improve its contaα with a magnαic write/sensor head. A guide, such as a groove 2104, is provided on die card 2101 to guide a magnαic write/sensor bead to ensure diat it moves over the magnαic strip in a read/write operation. The groove 2104 will be used to engage a pin on the magnαic head. Also, each end of die groove may be widened to assist d e pin of a magnetic bead to engage to d e groove 2104. On the odier side of die card, adhesive substance is provided for adhering die card to die cassette. A sliding cover (not shown) may optionally be provided to protect the magnetic tape. The card 2102 according to this implementation can be placed on the top of die cassette in a recess 2105 as shown in FIGs. 78-79 to reduce its exposure and die exposure of die magnetic strip. Alternatively, the card widi die magnαic strip may be placed on die back of die cassette casing as shown FIG. 80, and preferably in a recess thereon. If die thickness of the cassette is not long enough, then die magnαic strip can be divided into two portions, 2302 and 2303, to be read widi two magnαic heads. The card for carrying the magnαic strip is depiαed in FIG. 80 as 2301. Stationary Head FIG. 81 is a block diagram of a video cassette recorder widi a di eαory controller and a magnαic write and sensing system for information recorded on die back wall of die cassette and depicts an alternate embodiment of the present invention. FIG.s. 82a and 82b are side and top views of a magnαic write/sensor head unit 2500 implemented for reading data from and writing data to a magnetic strip. The magnαic write/sensor unit 2500 comprises a magnαic write/sensor head 2501 pivotally mounted on an arm 2502. The head 2501 has guides 2503, such as U-shape guides, for confining a magnαic strip 2506 beneath it as die magnαic strip 2506 passes under. The arm 2502 has means or guides 2503, such as a ball-point finger, for engaging to a guide 2507, such as a groove, which guides the head 2501 along over die magnαic strip 2506. The arm 2502 is mounted to a member 2508 by a pivot 2510 which gives it a freedom of vertical movement. The member 2508 is in turn mounted to a cantilever 2509 by another pivot 2511 which gives it a freedom of horizontal movement to adjust for die small displacement of die tape 2506. The head 2501 is mounted onto the arm by a pivot 2516 to provide azimuth alignment, mat is, to enable die head 2501 to move in parallel widi die tape 2506 even when the arm 2502 shifts in adjusting for a displaced tape. A lift cam 2512 is pivotally mounted to die member 2508. One arm 2513 of the cam 2512 is coupled by a spring 2514 to the cantilever 2509. In the absence of a cassette, die spring 2514 pulls e arm 2513 of the cam 2512 up, thereby lifting the head 2501. When a cassette is inserted, it pushes the odier arm 2515 of the cam 2512, thereby lowering the arm 2513 and allowing die head 2501 to drop onto the magnetic strip on the cassette. For a stationary magnαic head, the lengdi of die magnαic strip 150 that can be used for storing information is limited by die distance of movement of the cassette when it is ejeαed and inserted. Since data storage and retrieval for a movable head do not require movement of the cassette, therefore, another advantage of a movable head system is that die lengdi of d e magnetic strip 150 can be longer. With d e structure of the cassette 40, the VCR 1, and the magnαic strip 150 defined, d e operation of the VCR 1 with a cassette 40 is now described. To facilitate its use with a stationary magnαic head, die magnetic strip 150 has two parallel tracks of magnαizable material. The first track is a control track pre-recorded widi uniformly-spaced clock signals as illustrated in FIG. 83a. These clock signals are provided for synchronizing read/write opαations of data to die second data track. The rising and falling edges of die clock signals indicate die boundary of cells. Data can be recorded on die second track in many ways. In a specific embodiment, the data is recorded on d e second track using the modified non-return-to-zero (NRZ-M) method. Under this method, a bit "0" is represented by a no-change in magnαic field on die second track within two consecutive transitions on magnαic field on die control track; and a bit " 1 " is represented by a change in magnαic field within two consecutive transitions of magnαic field on die control track as can be seen in FIG. 83B. The flow chart in FIG. 84a illustrates generally die logic sequence of a write operation to the magnαic strip. The write operation is controlled by a read/write circuit which may reside eidier in die directory controller 30, as shown in FIG. 81, or separately (not shown) within the VCR 1. It can be implemented eidier by hard wired circuit or by software. Detailed description of die read/write circuit, however, is deemed unnecessary as it is well known in the art. In step 2001, the read/write circuit waits for a transition on the control track to occur. Upon encountering the first transition, the read/write circuit enters step 2002, in which it resets and starts a timer. In step 2003, the read/write circuit waits for the next transition on the control track to occur. When a transition occurs, die value of die timer is registered and dien restarted (step 2004). In step 2005, the read/write circuit delays for a time period equal to half the timer value registered in step 2004. Steps 2004 and 2005 are performed for the benefit of read operations, so that data can be sampled at time instances where die magnitude of die magnetic field is at peak values, as shown in FIG. 24C. These two steps can be omitted if appropriate actions are performed during die read operations. In step 2006, the data bit to be output is examined, if die output bit is a " 1 " , a signal is sent to die write/sensor head to change the magnαic field on die data track (step 2007). If the output bit is a "0", step 2007 is omitted. In step 2008, die read/write circuit dαermines whether the write operation is complαed. Step 2003 will be performed again if there are data left. The read/write head unit 154 actually comprises a first magnαic write/sensor head for reading d e control track and a second magnαic write/sensor head for reading die data track. The first magnαic write/sensor head, responsive to changes in magnαic field along die control track, generates clock pulses for sampling the signals received from the second magnαic write/sensor head. As previously described, for a stationary head, data are written into the magnαic strip 150 when it travels in one direction and read when it travels in the reverse direαion. To facilitate the read and write operations to be performed in opposite direαions, the data to be written into the data track of the magnαic strip 150 is preceded by a header 1901 as shown in FIG. 83B. The header 1901 is provided to synchronize the read/write circuit to die clock signals on die control track. The header 1901 according to d e preferred embodiment contains 24 bits of "1". Behind the header 1901 is a mark 1902 provided to indicate that whatever is read from the data track in die next clock cycle is a valid data bit. According to die preferred embodiment, the mark 1902 contains 6 "0" bits followed by 2 "1" bits. This bit pattern is chosen because it is not used to represent data. It will be understood that other bit patterns can be used. As write operations are performed in a reverse direction, mirror images 1902', 1901' of the mark 1902 and header 1901 respeαively are written at the end of die data field 1903 as shown in FIG. 83b. In addition, a parity byte 1904 is provided after die data field 1905 so diat die direαion of die magnαic field at each end can be dαermined. FIG. 83C illustrates the output from the second magnetic write/sensor head in reading die bit pattern of FIG. 83B. Ideally, die second magnαic write/sensor head should sample the data track at the mid point of two consecutive transitions on the control track. Unfortunately, there is a possibility that magnαic strip 150 is read by a first and second magnαic heads which are misaligned widi respeα to one anotiier, or diat die data track was written by a different recorder whose first and second magnαic heads are aligned differently from those reading die strip, with the result that die data track is not sampled at the proper time. To compensate for a possible misalignment between die two magnαic write/sensor heads, a calibration is performed when die header is read. Widi reference to the flow chart in FIG. 84B, the read/write circuit waits in step 2010 for the initiation of a read or a write operation. When a first transition at the control track is dαeαed, die read/write circuit resets and d en starts a timer (step 2011). In steps 2012 and 2013, d e read/write circuit continues to sample die data track until a transition on the control track is dαeαed. As die field in d e data track is formed by a series of " 1 " bits, a transition on the data track should occur witiiin the two consecutive transitions on the control track. When a transition on the data track is dαeαed, die time lag, Tl, between the first transition on the control track and die transition on the data track is measured. The control track is continuously read until die next transition is detected. The time difference, Tc, between the first and second transitions is calculated (step 2014). For better accuracy, steps 2012-2014 can be repeated for N times so mat average values of Tl and Tc can be obtained. A calibration value, which equals to Tl/Tc, is calculated (step 2016). FIG. 84C illustrates the logic sequence for a read operation of die magnαic strip 150. In step 2020, the read/write circuit waits for dαeαion of a transition on the control track. When a transition is deteαed, the read/write circuit enters step 2021 in which it resets and starts a timer. In step 2022, the read/write circuit waits for the occurrence of another transition on the control track. When such a transition is dαeαed, die timer is read and dien resα, and die time difference, Tr, between the two consecutive transitions on the control track is calculated (step 2023). In step 2024, the read/write circuit waits for a delay so diat die data track can be sampled at peak value. If steps 2004 and 2005 of die write operation of FIG. 25A are performed, die delay is Tr*(Tl/Tc). If steps 2004 and 2005 in the write operation are not performed, die delay is (Tr/2)+Tr(Tl/Tc). At the end of die delay, die output from the data head is sampled (step 2026). If the output from the data head is die same as its value in the last clock (step 2027), a "0" bit is output (step 2028). Otherwise, if d e output from the data head is changed, an " 1" bit is output (step 2029). Steps 2022-2029 are repeated until die last data is read (step 2030). A variety of other mechanical configurations and locations for the head 154 and die strip 150 may be employed to accommodate various tape cassette transport mechanisms. For example, the magnαic strip containing the directory may alternatively be accessed by a magnαic head which moves across the surface of die strip 150 when the cassette 40 is in the recorder 1, for reading or writing information from/to die strip 150. In the case when the entire directory is stored on die magnαic strip 150 at the point of ejeαion and read off by die writer/sensor head 154 and into RAM 33 at the point of insertion, once the directory is in RAM 33, the tape is searched, played, recorded as described in the previous examples. Referring now to FIG. 85 A, the figure depicts die flow diagram for loading a magnαic cassette with a magnαic strip affixed thereto and which holds die entire directory. During block S40, the cassette is physically inserted into the VCR 1. During block S42, the RAM 33 is cleared of any direαory. During block S44, the horizontal or vertical motion (depending on a front loading or top loading VCR model) of d e VCR 1 cause a change of magnαic flux generated by die directory on die magnαic strip which is read by die magnetic write/sensor head 154. If no directory exists, then during block S45, the sequence jumps to block S52 to display a blank directory. Otherwise, block S46 is entered and die directory is stored into die RAM 33. The tape is then rewound to die beginning of the tape (BOT) during block S48 and die tape counter is sα to zero or the first position indicator in block S50 to correspond to die absolute position of die tape. When the tape is ejeαed die entire directory in RAM 33 is written onto die magnαic strip 150 by the write/sensor head 154 as the cassette moves out of the VCR 1. FIG. 85B depicts die flow diagram for writing the entire directory to the magnetic strip during ejeαion of cassette when die EJECT button 3e is aαivated, block S200 is entered. During block S202 die RAM 33 is checked to dαermine whether a valid directory exists. If no directory exists, then block S206 is entered whereby d e cassette is simply ejected. If a directory exists, then during block S204, the cassette is ejeαed and die direαory is recorded on die magnetic strip 150 by the magnαic write/sensor head 154. Consider briefly die operation of die system of FIG. 1 and 81 widi die directory stored in die control track of the tape. Assume that cassette 40 has a directory recorded in die control track at the beginning of die tape, or at some point along die tape, and which has not been moved in its case since its last ejeαion is inserted into the VCR 1. At tape insertion, die microprocessor controller 31 and VCR control logic 21 cause the directory to be read from the control track of the tape with the read head 17 and stored into die directory field 33a of die RAM 33. Optionally, the directory is erased from the tape, after reading, widi die erase head 15. The VCR counter in the position logic and counter circuit 9 is sα to a value corresponding to die CURRENT LOC value found in die direαory. The tape is now ready to be read or recorded over in the usual manner. While the cassette is in the VCR 1, the copy of die directory diat is stored in die RAM 33 can be delαed, modified or updated. When die ejeα button 3e is aαivated, the microprocessor controller 31, and die VCR control logic circuit 21 causes the current tape location (CURRENT LOC) 1049 in the RAM 33 to be updated with die tape counter value in the position logic and counter circuit 9 and causes die directory in the RAM 33 to be recorded onto d e tape at roughly its current position and dien causes die tape to be slightly rewound to d e beginning of where the directory was recorded on die tape, and d en causes the motor and mechanical control 5 to physically ejeα die cassette 40. In another implementation, the rewind operation of the tape is not performed after recording the directory thereon; however, when the tape is inserted, it is read backward to retrieve the directory. When a blank cassette tape is loaded or when the user wants to modify or create a program directory, the directory controller 30 prompts the user on die display 32e or the video display 50 for desired input. In a specific embodiment, die input may include die lengdi of die tape, the tape label (volume number), αc. The microprocessor controller 31 then formulates die input to d e required format for storage into die RAM directory 33a for recording onto die tape when the tape is ejeαed. In die event diat die tape has been moved eidier forward or backward in die cassette from its last ejection position without subjeαing the tape to the direαory read/write process (such as when the tape is used in a VCR 1 without the present invention), a number of methods may be used to locate the directory. Where only one directory is stored on die tape, such as where the directory is promptly erased after being copied into the RAM memory, one method is to rewind die tape all the way to d e beginning of tape (BOT) and d en perform a quick search to dαect and locate d e directory. Alternatively, a marker is written in the control track in close proximity to the directory, whether the directory is recorded in the video fields or in the control track, and is deteαed during searching to dαect die location of die direαory as tiiis facilitates searching for the directory. Searching and inteφreting data in die control track is much faster than doing so in the video fields. FIG. 4 depicts die marker 110 adjacent d e directory 112 in die control track 42C whereas FIG. 5 depicts d e marker 114 in die control track 42C adjacent die directory 116 in die fields of d e video frames 42B. If there is more than one directory stored on die tape and only one is the current directory, two different methods may be used. The first method is depicted in FIGs. 86a-86d. In this mediod, a marker 118 is recorded in the control track 42C in close proximity to the directory 120, when the directory is first written during the process of ejeαing the tape from the VCR 1 (whether in the control track or in the video field) as illustrated in FIG. 86a. When the direαory 120 is subsequently read and copied into die RAM memory 33, a second marker 122 is recorded next to d e first marker 118 as shown in FIG. 86B. When die cassette is then ejected after the second playing or recording, a new directory 124 is written at a different position on the tape along with a single marker 126 as in FIG. 86C. As a result, if the position of the tape in the cassette has been moved, as indicated by die dashed lines for read/write heads 17, 19 in FIG. 86D, die system merely looks for the directory 124 with the single marker 126, preferably in a high speed search made to reduce access time. When the located directory 124 is subsequently read, a second marker (not shown) is recorded adjacent die marker 126 as described above. Consider now d e details of die operation of the system of FIGs. 1 and 81 in more detail widi reference to the method of FIGs. 87a and 87b. Assuming that die single directory marker technique of FIG. 86 is used, a direαory is stored in the control track 42c of the tape 42 and that the tape is a previously recorded tape with a directory recorded at die point of last ejeαion and a number of video programs (or records) previously recorded on die tape. During block SI, the cassette 40 is inserted into the VCR 1. The VCR 1 loads and mounts the cassette 40 so that tape 42 and die video head drum 13, die tape movement sensor 22, and die read/write/erase heads 17, 19, and 15, respectively, of die audio and control tracks are all in proper place with respeα to the tape 42 just before the directory is at an original position. During block S2, the microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR 1 to erase the contents of the RAM directory 33a in the RAM memory 33. During block S3, the microprocessor controller 31 , through the VCR control logic circuit 21, enables the motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to start rotating the tape reels 40b and 40c and hence move the tape 42 in a forward direαion. The microprocessor controller 31 and die VCR control logic circuit 21 also cause the control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to cause the read head 17 to read die directory from die control track 42c if the directory is there. If the direαory is not adjacent d e read/write heads 17, 19 at die point of insertion (such as if the tape 42 has been moved in the cassette case), then, during block S3A, the microprocessor controller 31, through the VCR control logic circuit 21 and die motor and mechanical control circuit 5, causes the tape 42 to be rewound to die BOT and fast search the control track 42c for a single marker. If the marker is not found when die end of tape (EOT) is encountered, dien, during blocks 58 the microprocessor controller 31 causes a blank direαory to be displayed eidier in the directory display 32e of die directory controller 30 or in the video display 50. On die odier hand, if die directory is found as in this case, during block S4, die directory is read into die RAM 33. The marker is erased during block S5. As an alternative, both die directory and the associated mark may be erased from the tape during block S5. During block S6, the microprocessor controller 31 causes die VCR control logic circuit 21 and d e motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to rewind die tape 42 so that die read/write heads 17, 19 are just before the directory. During block S7, die CURRENT LOC value 1049 (see FIG. 2) from the direαory is used to sα die tape counter in the position logic and counter circuit 9. During block S8, die direαory is displayed by die display 32e or by the video display 50 for user viewing, editing or input. The method now enters block S9 (FIG. 87b) and awaits further user instruαion. If die PLAY button 3b is activated by die user, processing continues in block S18. During block S19, the VCR 1 records or reads, i.e., plays tape and displays video images on the video screen 50a. If instead the STOP button 3c is activated, dien in block S22 die microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR control logic circuit 21 and the motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to stop the tape 42. The tape does 42 not necessarily stop at the end or beginning of a program. Block S24 is reached from block S9 when die EJECT button 3e is aαivated by die user. During block S25, the microprocessor controller 31 ascertains whether a directory 33 exists in the RAM 33. If a directory is not in the RAM 33, dien block S30 is processed causing the cassette 40 to be ejected widiout writing a direαory onto the tape 42. This occurs when die tape has no directory and d e user does not create one or the user delαed die directory from the RAM 33 through die directory input output display and control panel 32. Assume a directory exists in the RAM 33. In block S26, the microprocessor controller 31 causes die CURRENT LOC value 1049 (see FIG. 2) in die RAM 33 to be updated widi die current tape location value in the position logic and counter circuit 9. During blocks S27 and S28, d e microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR control logic circuit 21 and the motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to start moving the tape 42 in a forward direction. During block S27, die microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR control logic circuit 21 and die control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to record a single marker on the control track 42c where the directory is stored on die tape 42. During block S28, the microprocessor controller 31 causes the directory from the RAM 33 to be recorded onto die control track 42c of the tape 42 in close proximity to the marker. During block S29, the microprocessor controller 31 causes the control and audio track head logic circuit 11 and die motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to rewind slightly to a position before die directory. Thereafter during block S30, the microprocessor controller 31 causes the motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to ejeα the cassette tape 40 from the VCR 1. Next, consider die operation of die system of FIGs. 1 and 81 where die ejeαed tape of the previous example is reinserted into the VCR 1 widiout disturbing die tape location in its cassette case, and die user starts to search for a particular program on the tape 42. The same method as in die previous example is used except diat die VCR 1 under control of the microprocessor controller 31 reads d e directory off die tape at the position where the tape is inserted, and no searching of the tape for the directory is necessary. The operation sequence enters block S9 (FIG. 87B) after the tape cassette is loaded and awaits a funαion seleαion. The program enters block S10 when the user actuates die funαion SEARCH button 32b. During block SI 1, under control of the microprocessor controller 31, information is displayed on eidier die directory display 32e or die video display 50 which prompts the user to input on the keyboard 32a die name of the program or optionally, a program number on which to search. During block S12, the microprocessor controller 31 compares the value of die current tape location counter 1049 (see FIG. 3) with die program location value LOC from the RAM 33 for the program input by me user. If the program is located ahead on die tape, the microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR control logic circuit 21 and die motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to advance die tape 42 to the desired location during block S13. Otherwise, if die program is already past die current location, then die microprocessor controller 31 causes die VCR control logic circuit 21 and die motor and mechanical control circuit 5 to rewind die tape 42 to the desired location during block S14 following which the program is read and is displayed on die screen 50a. Referring now to FIG. 1, in anodier embodiment, the VBI portion of die video frames 42b (see FIGs. 5-6) can be used for providing address marks on die tape. In one implementation, when a cassette is inserted for die first time into a recorder embodying this invention, it is rewound to die beginning, and die tape counter is then reset to zero. When a VBI is encountered during die - - recording of a program, die value of die tape counter is registered. This tape counter value is dien written in one of the free spaces (such as line 20) among the VBI portion of the broadcast signals recorded onto the tape. The tape counter value can be written on die control track as in the VHS Address Search System (VASS). Alternatively, according to one aspect of tiiis invention, it can be written onto the video frame 42b (see FIGs. 4, 5); and die VBI decoder 60a can thereby be used advantageously to both decode d e program name and die address mark. If address marks are stored in the VBI portion of the cassette tape, the search operation can be performed by obtaining the difference between die current address mark and die address mark of the targα program. If the address marks are written onto die video frame as previously disclosed, die VCR control logic circuit 21 can obtain their values through the VBI decoder 60a (see FIG. 1). The difference between die current address mark and die address mark of the targα program is then sα into the position logic and counter circuit 9 (see. FIG. 1). Depending on die sign of die substraαion, either a fast forward or a fast rewind operation is then performed. When d e tape counter reaches zero, the fast forward or die fast rewind operation is stopped and a PLAY operation is initiated to start playing the tape. In an alternate implementation, each program is accompanied by a cue signal, preferably at eidier die beginning or the end of die program. Each recorded program is addressed by its relative position on the tape, in other words, the number of cue signals which the VCR would encounter in reaching d e program from a predefined tape position. Assuming, for illustration, that the tape is positioned between the tiiird program and fourth program, a targα program, say, the sevendi program, can be accessed by moving die tape fast forward until four cue signals are encountered. Furthermore, under this implementation, the cue signal may encode an identifier identifying die program. Next consider d e operation of die system of FIG. 1 where either a blank tape cassette or a prerecorded tape cassette with no directory is inserted into d e VCR 1. The directory controller 30 is equipped to eidier play die tape as a regular tape or to allow the user to create a directory on the tape. Referring again to FIGs. 87A and 87B, die cassette is loaded into die VCR 1 during block SI . The microprocessor controller 31 erases the direαory 33a portion of die RAM 33 of any remnant directory from the last tape during block S2. During block S3, die microprocessor controller 31 causes the VCR control logic circuit 21, the motor and mechanical control circuit 5, and die control and audio track head logic circuit 11 to advance and read die tape to determine whether a directory exists on the control track 42c at the current tape location. If no directory exists on the tape at the point of insertion, d e program enters block S3A during which time the tape is searched for a directory and if none are found, a blank directory is displayed and die sequence enters block S9 (FIG. 87b) where the microprocessor controller 31 awaits funαion seleαions. When the user actuates the MODIFY button 32c, the program enters block S 15 and dien block S16. During block S16, me microprocessor controller 31 causes die user to be prompted on the display 32e to enter a program name and/or program number, program location and program length (an entry) through die keyboard 32a. Alternatively, die prompt can appear on die display 50 and one of die titling methods described below can be used. During block S 17, an entry is processed by die microprocessor controller 31 to form an entry for the directory, and die resultant entry is dien stored into die directory 33a of die RAM 33. The program then returns to block S9 to wait for a further function selection. Alternatively, as depicted in FIG. 88, a marker 130 is recorded on die control track 42C next to a directory 132 whenever a new directory is created as shown in FIG. 88a. But, unlike die previous mediod, when die directory 132 is searched and copied into die RAM 33, the marker 130 is erased as shown in FIG. 88b. When a second new directory 134 is created, a marker 136 is recorded as in FIG. 88c. So even though there is more than one directory on the tape, and die tape has been moved in the cassette as indicated by die dashed illustration of die read/write heads 17, 19 in FIG. 88d, only the current directory 134 has a marker 136 associated with it for dαeαion and location of such current directory. To be discussed, in the embodiment of die invention depicted in FIG. 81, the location on the tape of the valid directory (i.e. die location of die tape at the point of ejeαion) is recorded on a store or a storage medium, for example a magnetic strip 150. The magnαic strip can be affixed at any side of die cassette, if that side would be moved relative to a fixed point in the VCR during loading and ejeα operations. However, since die mechanism for raising and lowering a cassette is on the sides of die opening, the magnαic strip is preferably affixed to eidier die top or the back side of d e tape cassette 40, and d e data (i.e. die location of the tape) is recorded by a magnαic write/sensor head 154 using die physical movement of die cassette load/ejeα drive mechanism to cause changes in magnαic flux dαectable by the magnαic write/sensor head 154. Load/ejeα drive mechanisms are well known in die art as they are part of most VCRs. The physical cassette movement typically involves a horizontal movement and a vertical movement for a VCR using either front loading or top loading as shown in FIGs. 74 and 75, respeαively. When the tape cassette is inserted into die VCR 1, die magnαic write/sensor head 154 reads off die location information from the magnαic strip to allow easy searching and locating of the valid directory. Consider die embodiment of FIG. 81 where the location of die latest or valid directory on die tape is stored on die magnαic strip 150 at the time of ejeαion. The location of die latest direαory is read off die strip 150 by the magnαic write/sensor 154 into the RAM 33 at reinsertion as a result of a change of magnetic flux caused by die horizontal or vertical movement of the tape cassette 40 with respeα to the magnαic write/sensor 154. The use of the directory location information is only necessary if the tape has been moved in its cassette case such that when the tape is inserted, die directory cannot be immediately read off from the tape at the point of insertion. FIG. 89 depicts how die directory location information is used to facilitate searching for the valid directory, where die tape addresses include a position indicator which indicate position along die tape from the BOT. During block S60, the tape cassette 40 is inserted into die VCR 1. During block S62, any directory in the RAM 33 is cleared. During block S64, the encoded directory location information is read off by the magnαic write/sensor head 154 as die magnαic strip 150 moves across the head. If die location read is not a valid location, then block S78 is entered to display a blank directory. Otherwise, the tape is rewound to BOT or to the first position indicator, if any, during block S68 to ascertain its absolute location. During block S70, the position logic and counter circuit 9 is sα to a value corresponding to die BOT or die value of die position indicator. The tape is then fast forwarded to die directory location during block S72 and the content of die directory is then read into die RAM 33 during block S74 and displayed during block S76. In die above embodiments, locations of programs recorded on die tape are identified as a funαion of address marks written at predetermined space intervals on die tape as a value of a tape reel counter at each of said predetermined space intervals. In another embodiment, the tape is not address-marked at predetermined space intervals. Instead, each addressable recorded program is associated widi a cue signal located at a predαermined location (i.e. either the start or die end) of die program. The cue signal can be written on one of die tracks of the tape, but preferably on the control track, by modifying die duty cycle of die synchronization pulse. Under this addressing system, a program is addressed by d e order of its position relative to other programs recorded on die tape, for example, the first program has an address of 1 and die second program has an address of 2, etc. A counter is kept by the microprocessor controller 31 for tracking the position of the tape; for example, when the tape is positioned between the cue signals of die third program and die fourth program, the counter would contain a value of "3" . To access a particular program, the difference between the program's address and die counter value is determined. Depending on sign of die difference, die tape is moved eidier forward or backward until die corresponding number of cue signals are encountered. Titie Editing Tides can be created and edited by a user before addition to the directory using die apparatus and methods described below and in FIGs. 1 and 90-91. Referring to FIG. 1, a jog shuttle knob 3f, as is well-known in the art, can be used to rapidly advance die tape in the direαion in which the knob is turned. Usually the knob has a center detent position which causes the display 50 to display a still frame of the video data on die tape directly over the read/write head 17, 19. The jog shuttle knob 3f is found on many professional-quality video cassette recorders, and is now available on some devices intended for die home markα. An exemplary recorder with a jog shuttle knob 3f is the Sony model SLV-373UC video cassette recorder, commercially available from Sony Corporation. Essentially, the jog shuttle knob 3f replaces the traditional fast forward and rewind controls on a VCR, and further enables slow-motion playback and rewinding, and still-frame viewing. As indicated, die jog shutde knob 3f is coupled to die VCR control logic 21 using means known in the art. The remote shuttle control 1300, the character generator 23, and a control program 33b stored in the directory controller 30 can be used to create video titles for die program directory. In one embodiment, the methods of FIGs. 91A, 91B are used in conneαion with an on-sαeen video display shown in FIG. 90C. The steps shown in FIGs. 90A, 90B are invoked when die system enters steps Sl l or S16 of FIG. 87B, step S78 of FIG. 89, step S52 of FIG. 85A, or steps Sl l, S16 of FIG. 88B. Upon entry of these steps, the system is placed under the control of a stored program coupled to die microprocessor controller 31 containing instructions to implement the steps of FIG. 90A. A menu is displayed at step 1402 and control is passed to step 1404 in which the system tests whether the directory display has been selected. If not, control is passed to step 1406 and die data-entry mode of FIG. 90A is terminated. Otherwise, control passes to step 1408 in which the directory display 32e is shown on d e video sαeen from the caption data sent to the directory during or immediately before the display of die directory. Thus, die caption data immediately appears in the directory display. The user dien may edit die caption to adjust it as desired. The display may take the form of FIG. 90C, comprising a representation of an alphabαic keyboard 50b in the upper portion of the screen, and a video title 50g in die lower portion. The keyboard representation 50d resembles a standard QWERTY-style typewriter keyboard. A plurality of rows 50e are displayed, each including a plurality of single charaαers 50f. The characters 50f match the labels of the standard typewriter keys in a QWERTY-layout keyboard. Initially, die titie 50g is entirely blank. If desired, die charaαer spaces available for filling with a titie can be represented by adjacent squares or rectangles as shown in FIG. 90C. Control is passed to step 1410 in which die system waits until a key is pressed on die remote control unit 1300. If a cursor key 1305 if pressed, control is passed to step 1412 and die on-screen cursor is moved to a new location. Otherwise, die control is passed to step 1414 in which die system tests whether die enter button 1303 has been pressed. If so, control is passed to step 1416 and die cursor is moved to die charaαer "Q" in the first row 50e of the keyboard representation 50d. Control is passed to step 1418 in which die system tests whether a cursor key f305 has been pressed. If so, control is passed to step 1422 and die cursor is moved to die next charaαer in the keyboard representation 50d. If desired, the current charaαer can be highlighted or shown in reverse video, as indicated by die charaαer "C" at 50j. Otherwise, control is passed to step 1420 and d e system tests whether die jog shutde knob 3f has been moved. If so, control is passed to step 1422 to move die cursor. Otherwise, control is passed to step 1424 and die system tests whether die enter key 1303 has been pressed. If so, die user is indicating that the current highlighted character 50j is desired to be entered in die current charaαer 50k of die titie 50g. Therefore, the control is passed to step 1426 in which me charaαer 50j is copied to location 50k and "frozen" in place by displaying it in normal video. Control is then passed to step 1422, to advance die charaαer position cursor 50k to die next position. Otherwise, control is passed to step 1428 and die system tests whether d e menu button 1304 has been pressed. If not, control is passed back to step 1418. If so, the user has indicated diat die displayed title is complαe and die user wishes to save the title in die directory. Therefore, control is passed to step 1430 in which die titie shown at 50g is copied into one of the program titie locations in die directory controller RAM 33. Control is passed to step 1406, thereby ending entry of a title. FIG. 90B illustrates a method for advancing a keyboard representation cursor such as that shown at position 50j. Since die entire keyboard 50d is represented as a plurality of rows 50e, a command (using die cursor keys or jog shuttle knob) to advance die cursor requires special processing at the end of each row. For example, in step 1450 the system tests whether the left arrow cursor key has been pressed or the jog shuttle knob has been moved to the left. If so, die next task (step 1452) is to test whether the current charaαer position is at the far left end of one of die rows 50e, i.e., whether die current charaαer is Q, A, or Z. If so, control is passed to step 1454 in which the system handles die overflow condition by taking one of a plurality of possible steps. If desired, the system can simply do nothing, causing die cursor to freeze at the left end of die row. Alternatively, the cursor can jump to die far right end of die same row. For example, if the current charaαer is "Q" and die user presses the left arrow cursor key, die cursor could jump to the letter "P" at the far end of die row. Further, the method could cause die cursor to jump to the end of die previous row, with "wrap around" if desired. Thus, if die cursor is on the letter "A" and the user presses die left arrow, the cursor can jump to the letter "P" on the row above. Any of these steps can be taken in step 1454. Otherwise, if die current cursor position is in the middle of a row, control is passed to step 1456 and die cursor is moved to die left. A similar series of steps 1458, 1460, 1462, 1464 handles movement of the cursor to the right. In this case, overflow at step 1462 can result in freezing the cursor, moving it to the next row, αc. As shown in steps 1466 to 1476, similar processing can be conduαed for the "up" and "down" arrow cursor keys. Wrap around can be implemented. For example, when die "up" arrow button is pressed and die cursor is currently on the first row 50e, die cursor can be made to jump to the third row. As is known in the art, the keyboard representation 50d can be created by commanding the charaαer generator circuit 23 to output a particular charaαer at a particular screen position. Thus, die microprocessor controller 31 can command die VCR control logic circuit 21 to "write" a charaαer on the screen by providing an ASCII code for a charaαer and coordinates of die desired screen position. The VCR control logic circuit 21 passes these parameters to the charaαer generator 23 with a command signal. The charaαer generator 23 receives the parameter data, retrieves a charaαer bit map from the charaαer ROM 25, and returns die appropriate display information to the VCR control logic circuit 21. The VCR control logic circuit 21 inserts the charaαer information into the output video signal and sends it to die video display 50a. This step for commanding a charaαer generator to output video charaαers to a display is known in die art. Using the above steps, the jog shutde remote can serve as a rapid data-entry unit to facilitate a quick selection of charaαers for a video program titie. An alternate method for creating video titles is shown in FIGs. 91A and 91B. Steps 1502-1508 are die same as steps 1404-1412 of FIG. 90A. When step 1404 is reached, the display shown in FIG. 9 IB is placed on die video screen 50a by the charaαer generator unit 23. As shown in FIG. 91B, a "scrollable" display 50c can comprise one or more titie lines 50g, each comprising a plurality of charaαers 50h. During entry of a titie, one of die charaαers 50h may be highlighted as designated by 50m. The highlighted charaαers is referred to as die "cursor position" of the title. When a new title is being entered, after die display of FIG. 9 IB is shown, control is passed to step 1510 of FIG. 91A. The cursor 50m is moved to die first (leftmost) position of the on-screen titie. Control is next passed to step 1512 to display die current charaαer at diat location. Initially, the current charaαer will be "A", which will appear in the leftmost position of the title. Control is passed to step 1514 in which the system tests whetiier an arrow button or die jog shuttle knob has been moved. If so, control is passed to step 1516. If the current charaαer is "Z" or "A", special processing is required. If die current character is "Z", and die right button was pressed, dien the cursor is changed to "A". Likewise, if the current charaαer is "A", and die left button is pressed, die current cursor changes to "Z". These steps are effeαed in step 1518. Otherwise, control is passed to step 1520 in which the current character is incremented or decremented depending on whether die left or right buttons (or jog shuttle knob) have been pressed. Thereafter, control is passed to step 1512 to display die current cursor. In real time, the user sees die charaαer at die current cursor position rapidly change from "A" through each letter of the alphabα as long as an arrow button or the jog shutde knob is being operated. If an arrow button or die jog shuttle knob is not in operation, control is passed to step 1522 and die system tests whether the "enter" button 1303 has been pressed. If so, die user desires to freeze and save die current charaαer. Therefore, control is passed to step 1524 in which the current displayed charaαer (and die remainder of the titie) are saved in a memory location coupled to die microprocessor controller. The cursor is dien advanced to d e next available cursor position, if any, as indicated in step 1525. After the cursor is advanced, d e current charaαer at that position is displayed; as indicated above, this will be die letter "A". If "ENTER" has not been pressed, control is passed to step 1526, in which the system tests whether die menu button 1304 has been pressed. If not, control is passed back to step 1512. If so, the user desires to save the entire titie. Therefore, control is passed to step 1528 in which the entire displayed titie is saved into one of the program title locations of the direαory 33a in the RAM 33. Entry of a titie is then complete and control terminates at step 1530. Thus, using the method of FIG. 91A, rapid entry of video tides is possible. Each .charaαer position is handled seriatim, with die cursor passing from charaαer to charaαer until complαion. At each charaαer position, the display initially shows the letter "A", and dien rapidly advances dirough the alphabet as die arrow buttons or jog shutde knob are operated. If no titie is dαeαed from the broadcast signals and if no titie is entered by a user, then a default title is inserted into die directory. The default titie may include such information as die channel from which the program is received, die date and time the program is recorded, and so forth. As an optional embodiment, a field, hereinafter referred to as a "program category" is also provided. The program category identifies die kind, such as whether the corresponding program is a sport program, a movie, a talk show, and so forth. The availability of this program category field further facilitates seleαion of recorded programs and operation of die VCR. The program category can be entered in the same way as a titie. This is, the program category can be transmitted during die VBI portion of the broadcast video signal, and decoded by means of special decoding circuitry; alternatively, it can be entered by means of a jog as described above. Insertion of the cassette, as used herein, includes die manual insertion of die cassette into any mechanical tape carriage in die VCR as well as any movement by the VCR of die cassette on the carriage into a reading position adjacent heads 13, 15, 17 and 19. The flow chart in FIG. 92a, 92b show additional options diat are provided to a user when a directory is available. FIGs. 92a-92b are steps diat specifically relate to a system which uses a stationary head to access directory information from a magnαic strip. Counteφart flow charts for a system which has a moving head or a semiconduαor memory are shown in FIGs. 93a and 93b. When die user actuates the cursor movement keys, step 1801 is entered. A pointer is provided in the microprocessor controller 31 to point to the directory 33a at the entry (or a field witiiin an entry) identified by die cursor; when the cursor movement keys are actuated, tiiis pointer moves correspondingly (step 1802). If die ERASE button is then actuated (step 1803), die directory controller 30 will use die information from the directory 33a to locate die program and erase diat program from the tape 42 (step 1804). After the program is erased, d e directory 33a in die RAM 33 is updated (step 1805) to show diat die entry is empty or available for recording a new program. For a moving head or semiconduαor memory system the strip or the semiconductor memory ("store") can be updated dien. In addition to die normal erase operation described hereinabove, the direαory controller 30 allows a user to "speed erase" a program. When this operation is initiated, by actuation (step 1806) a "SPEED ERASE" key, the direαory controller 30 simply invalidates die corresponding entry in the direαory 33a widiout actually performing an erase operation on the tape 42 (step 1805). For a moving head or semiconductor memory system the secondary store can be updated. The invalidation of step 1805 can be performed, for example, by setting an "invalidate" bit stored widi die entry. A recording operation can be performed in two different modes. According to die first mode, die cursor is moved to seleα an entry from the directory 33a. After the entry is selected, if a recording operation is initiated from the keyboard (step 1807), the directory controller 30 will record die program on the tape portion corresponding to die seleαed entry (step 1808). After the program is recorded on tape, the directory 33a is updated (step 1809). For a moving head or semiconductor memory system, the store can be updated dien. The second mode of operation is initiated when die user actuates (step 1810) a predefined key pattern and sequence to perform a fast recording operation. In a fast recording operation, the director controller 30 operates to search for an empty entry which is long enough to record die program (step 1811). Algorithms may also be implemented so that an optimal entry, for example, one whose length is closest to the length of the program, is seleαed. When die entry is seleαed (step 1813), die directory controller 30 records die program thereon (step 1813), and die directory 33a is updated accordingly (step 1814). For a moving head or semiconduαor memory system, the direαory in the secondary store can be updated then. The directory controller 33a also gives a user the option to view the titie of the program being shown on the television. When this operation is initiated by actuating a predefined key pattern (step 1820), die directory controller 30 first investigates whether die VCR is showing a broadcasting program or a recorded program (step 1821). If die VCR is showing a broadcasting program and if die titie of the program is transmitted among the broadcast signals (as in the VBI portion as described above), the direαory controller 30 will generate the titie from the broadcast signals and display it on die television screen (step 1822). On die odier hand, if the VCR is playing a recorded program, the direαory controller 30 will retrieve the titie from the direαory 33a and display it on die screen (step 1823). In die preferred embodiment, a timer is kept in the direαory controller 30 so that the titie is removed from die screen after five seconds (step 1824). When die user presses the EJECT, the cassette is ejeαed. For a stationary head system, the store is updated while die cassette is being ejeαed. However, for a moving head or semiconduαor memory system, since all updates are performed, no action is then needed. In an alternate embodiment to all systems using pointers, die indexing VCR 10 has a VBI decoder capable of decoding all lines of the VBI or at least those lines containing relevant information. In this embodiment, pointers are not used, because the VCR processes all lines of the VBI. After reading all lines, die microprocessor controller 31 identifies die data by die type symbol. Subsequent processing of the data dien continues as it does in a pointer system. In d e foregoing, certain values and representations are used to facilitate description and understanding of die invention. For example, operations of the microprocessor controller 31 is described as being responsive to aαivation of certain keys ("RECORD", "PLAY", "I", "VCR PLUS+™", αc). It will be understood, however, diat such keys may be implemented by any predefined sequence of keys. Moreover, values of electrical components are shown for circuits illustrated in some of the figures, it will be understood such values are shown to facilitate implementation of the invention and die funαions of die circuits can be accomplished by odier values or even odier components. Therefore, the foregoing description should not be read as pertaining only to die precise structures and techniques described, but rather should be read consistent widi, and as support for, die following claims, which are to have their fullest and fair scope.

Claims: WHAT IS CLAIMED IS: 1. A video tape player, comprising: a receiver capable of receiving broadcast video signals, a first magnαic head for recording said broadcast video signals onto a cassαte tape, a decoder coupled to said receiver and decoding signals contained in a predαermined interval of said broadcast video signals to produce information signals, and a controller receiving information signals and using said information signals to operate said video tape player. 2. The video tape player as in claim 1 , wherein said predetermined interval of said broadcast video signals comprises a vertical blanking interval (VBI) of said broadcast video signals. 3. The video tape player as in claim 1, wherein said broadcast video signals belong to a first video program having a titie and wherein said signals contained in said predαermined interval include signals representing said titie. 4. The video tape player as in claim 3, wherein said video tape player further comprises means for storing said titie in a direαory of video programs recorded'on said cassette tape. 5. The video tape player as in claim 4, wherein said titie storing means comprises means for storing said titie on a magnαic strip carried on said cassette tape. 6. The video tape player as in claim 4, wherein said titie storing means comprises means for storing said title in a semiconductor memory carried on said cassette tape. 7. The video tape player as in claim 4, wherein said titie storing means comprises means for storing said titie on a track of said tape. 8. The video tape player as in claim 7, wherein said track is a control track. 9. The video tape player as in claim 7, wherein said track is a video track. 10. The video tape player as in claim 9, wherein said titie is stored in portions of said video track which record vertical blanking intervals of video signals. 11. The video tape player as in claim 5, where said means for storing said title comprises a stationary magnαic head located in said video tape player. 12. The video tape player as in claim 5, wherein said means for storing said titie comprises a magnetic head movable along said magnetic strip. 13. The video tape player as in claim 1, wherein said broadcast video signals belong to a first video program with a time duration of a schedule lengdi and wherein said signals contained in said predetermined interval of broadcast video signals include signals representing said lengdi. 14. The video tape player as in claim 1 , wherein said broadcast video signals belong to a first video program wid a scheduled time duration of a given lengdi and wherein said signals contained in said predαermined interval of broadcast video signals include information that said first video program is extended beyond said scheduled length. 15. The video tape player as in claim 1, wherein said signals contained in said predetermined interval of broadcast video signals represent auxiliary information related to a first video program. 16. The video tape player as in claim 15, wherein said auxiliary information include information relating to broadcasting schedule of a second video program. 17. The video tape player as in claim 15, further comprising means for storing said auxiliary information and means for displaying said auxiliary information in response to an input initiated by a user. 18. The video tape player as in claim 1, further comprising means for storing said information signals in a storage medium. 19. The video tape player as in claim 18, wherein said storage medium is a magnetic strip carried on said cassette tape and wherein said video tape player further comprises a secondary magnαic head capable of writing and reading data on said magnetic strip. 20. The video tape player as in claim 19, wherein said secondary magnetic head is capable of moving along a direαion parallel to said magnetic strip. 21. The video tape player as in claim 18, wherein said storage medium is a semiconductor memory carried by said cassette tape and wherein said video tape player further comprises means for read and writing data in said semiconductor memory. 22. The video tape player as in ciaim 21, wherein said reading and writing means communicates data widi said semiconduαor memory serially. 23. The video tape player as in claim 22, wherein said semiconductor memory comprises a first input for communicating a clock signal and a second input for communicating both address and data. 24. The video tape player as in claim 18, wherein said means for storing said information comprises means for storing said information signals on a track on a cassette tape coupled to said video tape player. 25. The video tape player as in claim 24, wherein said track is a control track. 26. The video tape player as in claim 18, wherein said means for storing said information signals comprises means for storing said information signals into a predetermined interval of video signals recorded on a tape coupled to said video player, comprising an encoder circuit receiving said information and encoding said information into signals suitable for storage into said predαermined interval on said tape. 27. The video player as in claim 26, wherein said predetermined interval on said tape is a vertical blanking interval. 28. A remote controller for operating a video cassette player, said video cassette player having receiver receiving a first program of broadcast video signals, said broadcast video signal include a vertical blanking interval (VBI), the remote controller comprising: a plurality of keys, an interface circuit for generating remote control signals to said video cassette player, a control circuit responsive to aαivation of one or more of said keys for triggering said circuit to generate remote control signals to said video cassette player and causing said video cassette player to decode signals from said VBI to manage operation of die cassette player. 29. A remote controller as in claim 28, wherein said control circuit comprises means for causing said video cassette player to decode from said VBI signals representing a titie of said video signals. 30. A remote controller as in claim 28, wherein said control circuit comprises means responsive to aαivation of a key for causing said video cassette player to decode from said VBI signals representing broadcast schedule information of a second program related to said first program. 31. A remote controller as in claim 30, wherein said broadcast information include channel-date-time-length information of broadcast of said second program. 32. A remote controller as in claim 28, wherein said control circuit comprises means responsive to aαivation of a key for causing said video cassette player to retrieve from a VBI text information and storing said text in a memory. 33. A recording medium, comprising: a casing, a magnetic tape within said casing for recording video signals, a semiconductor memory carried by said casing, wherein said semiconductor memory communicates data serially. 34. A recording medium for affixing to a cassette of magnetic tape, comprising: a base material, a strip of magnαizable material carried by said base material, said strip of magnαizable material having a read-only code for controlling operations of a recorder operating on said cassette of magnetic tape. 35. A recording medium as in claim 34, wherein said magnetizable material is recorded at a defined data density and wherein said read-only code comprises a code representing said recording density. 36. A recording medium as in claim 35, wherein said read-only code include a representation of the length of said magnetic tape of said cassette. 37. A recording medium as in claim 36, wherein said read-only code include a representation of recording density of data recorded on said magnetic strip. 38. A video tape player, comprising: a first magnetic head for communicating video signals widi a video track on a magnαic tape, said magnαic tape recording one or more programs of video signals, a second magnαic head for communicating control signals with a control track on said magnetic tape, said control signals synchronizing said first magnetic head with movement of said magnαic tape, means coupled to said second magnetic head for recording a directory of said programs on said control track. 39. A video tape player as in claim 38, wherein control signals comprise a pulse with a first edge and a second edge having a predefined time separation, and said means for recording said directory comprises means for modifying said time separation. 40. A video tape player as in claim 38, wherein said means for recording a directory comprises means for writing a program titie in said direαory. 41. A video tape player as in claim 40, further comprising means for receiving video broadcast signals, said video broadcast signals having a predetermined interval for communication program titie of a video program and wherein said means for writing a program titie includes means for extraαing said program titie from said predetermined interval. 42. A video tape player as in claim 38, wherein said means for recording a direαory comprises means for writing a program length in said directory. 43. A video tape player as in claim 42, further comprising means for receiving video broadcast signals, said video broadcast signals having a predαermined interval for communication program titie of a video program and wherein said means for writing a program titie includes means for extraαing said program titie from said predαermined interval. 44. A video tape player, comprising: a receiver receiving broadcast video signals, a first magnαic head for communicating said video signals widi a magnetic tape in a cassette, and a second magnαic head for communicating directory information relating to video signals with a magnαic strip carried on said cassette, said second magnetic head capable of moving in parallel with said magnetic strip in communicating said directory information. 45. A video tape player as in claim 44, further comprising means coupled to said second magnαic head for writing a directory on programs stored on said magnαic tape. 46. A video tape player as in claim 45, further comprising means coupled to said direαory writing means for storing a tide in said directory corresponding to a program recorded on said magnetic tape. 47. A video tape player as in claim 46, wherein said titie storing means comprises means for extraαing said title from said broadcast video signals. 48. A video tape player as in claim 47, wherein said titie extraαing means comprises means for decoding signals containing in a vertical blanking interval. 49. A magnαic tape recorder/player comprising: a receiver capable of receiving broadcast video signals; a decoder coupled to said receiver for decoding signals contained in a predαermined interval of said broadcast video signals to produce information signals; means for displaying on a TV receiver an icon to alert a user to the presence of information signals and for displaying a code to be entered for storing the information signals; means responsive to a user input of die code for storing in memory the information signals; and, means responsive to a user input for providing die information contained in the stored information signals to an external device. 50. The magnetic tape recorder/player of claim 49 wherein the external device is a printer. 51. The magnαic tape recorder/player of claim 49 wherein the external device is a disk drive. 52. The magnαic tape recorder/player of claim 49 wherein the external device is an infrared signal receiver. 53. A magnetic tape recorder /player comprising: a receiver capable of receiving broadcast video signals; a decoder coupled to said receiver for decoding signals contained in a predαermined interval of said broadcast video signals to produce information signals; means for displaying on a TV receiver an icon to alert a user to the presence of information signals and for displaying a code to be entered for storing the information signals; means responsive to a user input of the code for storing in memory the information signals; and, means responsive to a user input for displaying for review the stored information from the information signal. 54. A method of recovering and displaying a direαory associated widi a video comprising the steps of: playing die tape for a seleαed interval of time; reading the control track to recover the tape ID; determining die presence of the tape ID if the tape ID is present, reading a memory to recover a direαory corresponding to the tape ID, if present in me memory, and displaying die direαory from the memory on a screen; if the corresponding directory is not present in die memory, reading die vertical blanking interval portion of die video on d e tape to recover the corresponding directory, if present in the vertical blanking interval portion and displaying the directory from the vertical blanking interval portion on a screen. 55. A method of recovering and displaying a directory for either a PR tape or an HR tape, comprising the steps of: playing the tape for a seleαed interval of time; reading die control track to recover a tape ID and an address of die current position of the tape; dαermining die presence of die tape ID and address; if die tape ID and address are present, next determining from the tape ID whether die tape is an HR or a PR tape; if the tape is an HR tape, recovering the directory for the tape from a memory and displaying die direαory on a screen; if die tape is a PR tape, determining die presence of die directory for die tape in a memory; if the directory is present in the memory, displaying die directory on a screen; and, if die direαory is not present in the memory, reading die directory from the vertical blanking interval portion of the video on die tape and displaying die directory on a screen. 56. A mediod of recovering and displaying a direαory for either a PR tape, an HR tape, or an HR loaner tape, comprising the steps of playing the tape for a seleαed interval of time; reading die control track of the tape to recover the tape ID and die address of the current position of the tape; determining the presence of die tape ID and address; if die tape ID and address are present, next determining from the tape ID whether die tape is an HR, a PR, or an HR loaner tape; if the tape is an HR tape, recovering the directory for the tape from a memory and displaying die directory on a screen; if die tape is a PR tape, dαermining the presence of the directory for the tape in a memory; if the directory is present in die memory, displaying die directory on the screen; and if die direαory is not present in the memory, reading die directory from the vertical blanking interval portion of the video on die tape and displaying die directory on the screen; if the tape is an HR loaner tape, fast-forwarding die tape to near die end of die tape, reading die directory from the vertical blanking interval portion of the video on die tape, and displaying die directory on die screen. 57. A mediod of indexing a PR tape at time of recording comprising the steps of recording in d e control track of the tape at the location of die beginning of a program a tape ID and an absolute address for the beginning of the program; and, recording on one or more seleαed vertical blanking interval lines a directory for the programs recorded on die tape. 58. A method of indexing an HR tape at time of recording comprising the steps of recording a tape ID and an absolute address in the control track at the beginning of each program recorded on die tape; recording die tape ID and d e absolute address in the control track at the end of die last program recorded on die tape; recording die tape ID and die absolute address of die tape location several times along the lengdi of die tape; and, recording in a memory an identification of each program with die address for each identification for a program being the absolute address of die beginning of the program recorded on die tape. 59. A multiple VCR system comprising a first direαory controller including a memory containing the directory information for one or more tapes; a second directory controller having a memory for storing the directory of tapes; a bus for two-way communication conneαed between the first and second directory controllers; and, means for controlling the transmission of the directory information from the memory of the first direαory controller to the memory of the second direαory controller. 60. The method of claim 54 further including die steps of: if die corresponding directory is not present in the VBI, moving the tape to a predαermined location on the tape to read die directory from the VBI; if not direαory is present, dαermining whether a video signal was dαeαed when die tape was played for the seleαed interval of time; requesting the user to identify die type of tape; if the tape is identified as blank tape, create a blank directory for the tape and identify it by a tape number; if the tape was identified as a non-indexed tape, asking the user if he wants to retroactively index; and if die tape was identified as a retroaαively indexed tape, search the control track for a tape identification number, retrieve the directory from the memory. 61. An indexing video tape system comprising: a video tape recorder; a VBI decoder for decoding information from the vertical blanking interval of a video signal provided by eidier a remote broadcaster, die video tape recorder, or another video tape recorder; a VBI encoder for encoding information on the vertical blanking interval of a video signal diat is provided to the video tape recorder; a memory for storing directory information of a video tape; a display for displaying d e directory information or the decoded information; and a controller of the tape system receiving the information and using die directory and decoded information to operate the indexing video tape system. 62. The indexing video tape system of claim 61 further comprising an infrared signal dαector for detecting infrared signals from a remote controller, the signals containing user seleαed commands, and die controller of the tape system further receives the user selected commands from the infrared signal detector and also uses die commands to operate the indexing video tape system. 63. A method of recovering and displaying a tape directory for either a prerecorded (PR) tape or a home recorded (HR) tape, comprising the steps of: playing the tape for a seleαed interval of time; reading die vertical blanking interval (VBI) to recover a tape identification number; determining the presence of die tape identification number; if die tape identification number is present, dαermining from the tape identification number whether the tape is an HR or a PR tape; if the tape is an HR tape, recovering the tape directory for die tape from a memory and displaying die tape direαory on a screen; if the tape is a PR tape, dαermining the presence of the tape directory for die tape in die memory; if the tape direαory is present in the memory, displaying die tape directory on a screen; and, if die tape direαory is not present in the memory, reading die tape directory from the vertical blanking interval portion of the video on die tape and displaying die tape directory on a screen. 64. The method of claim 63 wherein the HR tape includes a video magazine, the video magazine having a magazine directory stored on the tape, the method further comprising the steps of: reading d e VBI to recover a program number for the current position of the tape; retrieving the tape directory information associated widi die program number to dαermine whether the program on the tape that is associated wid die program number is a video magazine; and if d e program is a video magazine, reading die magazine directory for the video magazine from die tape and displaying die magazine directory on die screen. 65. The method of claim 63 where die directory for die video magazine is in the VBI. 66. The mediod of claim 63 further comprising the steps of: reading die VBI to recover a program number for the current position of die tape: comparing the recovered program number to programs in the tape directory to dαermine the current program corresponding to die program number; and flagging a portion of the displayed tape directory corresponding to die current program. 67. The method of claim 63 wherein the tape direαory includes addressing information and further comprises the step of determining the current address for die current position on the tape. 68. The method of claim 67 wherein die step of determining the current address includes die step of measuring the rotation rate of each tape spindle. 69. The method of claim 63 further comprising the steps of: if die tape directory is not on die VBI, displaying a request for a tape number from the user; and retrieving from the memory a corresponding tape directory in response to a user inputted command and displaying die direαory. 70. The method of claim 69 further comprising the steps of: retrieving from the memory an ejection program number; dαermining the absolute address; calculating die corresponding program number of the determined absolute address; comparing the corresponding program number to the ejeαion program number; and if different, storing in the memory the corresponding program number as the ejeαion program number. 71. A method for indexing a previously recorded tape having a plurality of programs recorded thereon comprising die steps of: (a) advancing d e tape to the beginning of a program on the tape in response to first user seleαed commands; (b) storing in a memory directory information of the program in response to second user seleαed commands; (c) recording a tape identification number and an absolute address on die control track at the beginning of each program recorded on die tape; (d) recording die tape identification number and die absolute address on the control track at the end of die last program recorded on die tape; (e) recording die tape identification number and die absolute address of die tape location in a plurality of locations along the length of die tape; (f) recording in a memory an identifier for each program with die address for each identifier for a program being the absolute address of die beginning of the program recorded on die tape; and (g) repeating steps (a) - (f) for each program on die tape. 72. A method for indexing a previously recorded tape having a plurality of programs recorded thereon comprising the steps of: (a) advancing die tape to the beginning of a program on the tape in response to first user seleαed commands; (b) storing in a memory directory information of the program in response to second user seleαed commands; (c) recording an indexing mark on the control track at the beginning of the program recorded on the tape; (d) recording in a memory an identifier for each program; and (f) repeating steps (a) - (d) for each program on die tape. 73. The method of claim 72 further comprising the steps of: measuring me absolute address of die program; and recording in the memory the absolute address of die program. 74. A method for backing up a first memory in an indexing VCR onto a video tape, the mediod comprising the steps of: retrieving the contents of the first memory; receiving a broadcasted video signal; encoding the contents of the first memory onto a predetermined portion of die vertical blanking interval of the video signal; writing the encoded video signal on die video tape; and storing in a second memory an identification code for the video tape. 75. A method for recreating a library comprising the steps of: reading a first memory to identify a tape containing a copy of the library, a tape identification number of die tape, and the location of die directory on die tape; display on a screen a prompt requesting a user to insert the tape into the VCR; reading, upon insertion of the tape, a tape identification of die inserted tape; comparing the read tape identification number to the tape identification number of the requested tape; dαermining die location on the tape; advancing d e tape from the location to die location of the directory. reading die directory from the tape; storing the directory in a second memory. 76. The method of claim 75 wherein the second memory is a random access memory in an indexing VCR. 77. The method of claim 75 wherein die first memory is a nonvolatile memory. 78. The method of claim 77 wherein the first memory is an EEPROM. 79. A method for broadcasting information comprising die steps of: generating an information symbol containing the information; generating a type symbol related to die content of the information; generating a scrambling key from a portion of the type symbol; scrambling the information symbol using die scrambling key to generate a scrambled information symbol combining the scrambled information symbol and die type symbol to form a data packα; generating a video program; combining the video program and die data packet to form a video signal; and transmitting the video signal. 80. The mediod of claim 79 wherein the data packα is broadcasted in die VBI. 81. The mediod of claim 79 wherein the data is of a binary form having a bit of either a first or second type, and further including die steps of (a) applying each bit of die key to a predetermined number of pairs of charaαers in the data; (b) swapping the charaαers of the pair if the assigned bit is of a first type; (c) otherwise, not swapping the charaαers of the pair if the assigned bit is of a second type; and repeating the steps (a)-(c) for all pairs of charaαers of the data. 82. The mediod of claim 81 wherein the first type is a one and die second type is a zero. 83. A method for recording information on a video tape comprising the steps of: generating a tape identification number; generating a directory data packα, die directory data packα having directory information; generating a scrambling key from a portion of the tape identification number; scrambling die directory information using the scrambling key to generate a scrambled directory data packα; generating a plurality of video programs; combining the plurality of video programs and die scrambled directory data packα to form a video signal; and writing the video signal on die video tape. 84. A video tape comprising: a recording medium having a plurality of video frames a plurality of video programs recorded in a first group of video frames; and a directory containing information related to die video programs, a first portion of the information being scrambled using a scrambling key generated from a second portion of the information, the directory being in the vertical blanking interval of a second group of video frames. 85. The video tape of claim 84 wherein the second portion of die information includes a tape identification number. 86. The video tape of claim 85 wherein die second portion of die information includes a type symbol. 87. A method for descrambling data comprising the steps of: deteαing video signals containing video programs and information, the information having a first portion of unscrambled information and a second portion of scrambled information; generating a descrambling key from part of the first portion of information; and applying d e descrambling key to the second portion of die scrambled information to generate unscrambled information. 88. The method of claim 87 wherein the first portion includes a type symbol. 89. The method of claim 88 where the step of detecting video signals includes die step of dαecting video signals from a broadcasted signal. 90. The mediod of claim 89 wherein d e first portion includes a tape identification number. 91. The method of claim 90 wherein the step of dαecting video signals includes die step of reading video signals from a prerecorded tape. 92. A mediod for copying the information on a prerecorded tape onto a second tape, die information including a plurality of video programs recorded in video frames, directory information related to the video programs recorded in a plurality of lines in the vertical blanking interval of the video frames, and an indexing mark recorded on the control track, the method comprising the steps of: reading in a master indexing VCR die prerecorded tape the plurality of video programs; reading in die master indexing VCR the prerecorded tape the directory information from die vertical blanking interval; generating from the read plurality of video programs and die read directory information a video signal representative of the information on the prerecorded tape; dαecting die indexing mark recorded on d e control track of the prerecorded tape; generating an indexing command in response to the dαeαed indexing mark; writing in a plurality of slave indexing VCRs the video signal in video frames on a plurality of slave tapes; and writing on each slave tape, in response to the indexing command, an indexing mark similar to the dαeαed indexing mark on die prerecorded tape. 93. The method of claim 92 wherein the indexing mark is a VISS mark. 94. A method for copying die information on a prerecorded tape onto a second tape, the information including a plurality of video programs recorded in video frames, directory information related to die video programs recorded in a plurality of lines in vertical blanking interval of die video frames, and an indexing mark recorded on d e control track, the method comprising the steps of: placing die second tape proximate to the prerecorded tape; and applying magnαic signals to the prerecorded tape and d e second tape to reproduce on die second tape the information on die prerecorded tape. 95. A video tape comprising: (a) a recording medium; (b) a plurality of video segments recorded as video frames on the recording medium, each video frame having video images, each video segment having in the vertical blanking interval first identifying information related to die video segments and second identifying information related to the recording medium; and (c) a control track recorded on die recording medium having third identifying information related to d e position of die video segments. 96. The video tape of claim 95 wherein the second identifying information includes a recording medium identifier. 97. The video tape of claim 95 wherein die second identifying information includes an address identifier of the location of die tape. 98. The video tape of claim 95 wherein die first identifying information includes a program number and die second identifying information includes a tape identification number. 99. The video tape of claim 95 wherein the first identifying information includes a directory of a portion of die information in the video frames. 100. The video tape of claim 95 wherein the first identifying information is an absolute address and die second identifying information is a tape identification number. 101. The video tape of claim 95 wherein the second identifying information includes an address identifier of the location of die tape. 102. A method for processing auxiliary information broadcasted as a video signal, die auxiliary information being related to a broadcasted video program, the method comprising the steps of: dαeαing die auxiliary information broadcasted as a video signal; dαeαing d e broadcasted video program; displaying on a screen a first symbol to inform a user of the presence of die auxiliary information; storing die auxiliary information in a memory in response to a first user command; displaying the auxiliary information on the screen in response to a second user command; and printing the auxiliary information in response to a third user command. 103. A method for retrieving data containing information related to a broadcasted video program transmitted in a video signal comprising the steps of: dαeαing d e data in the video signal; displaying in temporal proximity to the broadcasted program a prompt on me screen informing a user that information related to die broadcasted video program is available; dαecting user selection commands; and storing in a memory the information related to die broadcasted video program in response to the dαeαed user seleαion commands. 104. The mediod of claim 103 wherein a portion of the data is broadcasted at a later time and die information includes timer programming information, the method further comprising die step of timer programming the video cassette recorder to record die portion of the data diat is broadcasted at a later time using die timer programming information. 105. The method of claim 103 wherein the timer programming information includes die date, channel, start time and lengdi of die second type of data. 106. The mediod of claim 105 wherein the date, channel, start time and lengdi of the second type of data is encrypted. 107. The method of claim 106 wherein the timer programming information includes code numbers. 108. The mediod of claim 103 further including d e step of displaying die information. 109. The mediod of claim 103 further comprising the step of recording die information on a recording medium. 110. The mediod of claim 104 wherein die video picture is a video magazine and die data is program related information. 111. The mediod of claim 103 wherein the data is transmitted in the vertical blanking interval. 112. A method for mapping received channel numbers to assigned channel numbers, the method comprising the steps of: deteαing a broadcasted video signal; reading in the broadcasted video signal information containing die assigned channel number; and relating die assigned channel numbers to the received channel numbers to generate a channel map. 113. The method of claim 112 wherein the assigned channel numbers correspond to die channel numbers assigned by a timer video programmer. 114. The method of claim 113 including the steps of broadcasting die code number assigned to a corresponding program and decoding die code numbers to generate the assigned channel number. 115. The method of claim 112 wherein a local cable operator determines d e received channel numbers. 116. The method of claim 112 further including d e steps of scanning each received channel; dαermining a received channel number; dαermining the assigned channel number; and generating a channel map. 117. The method of claim 116 wherein the step of scanning each received channel is done at turn on of an indexing VCR. 118. The method of claim 112 further comprising the step of storing in a memory the channel map. 119. A mediod for automatic setting the time of a clock in a VCR comprising the steps of: dαeαing die date and time information broadcasted in the VBI of a video signal; and setting the clock in die VCR to die detected date and time. 120. The method of claim 119 further including die steps of: dαeαing a power interruption; and resetting die clock in response to die dαeαed power interruption. 121. A method for controlling the programs watched by a first plurality of viewers comprising the steps of: broadcasting in temporal proximity to a broadcasted program a program category; seleαing a first group of program category that is to be restricted; seleαing a password to allow access to said restriαed categories; monitoring program category of program being broadcasted; comparing the monitored program category with die first group of category; if a match, requesting a password; dαeαing die requested password; comparing the dαeαed password widi die seleαed password; if password match, allow viewing if not match, disabling d e playing of a tape, recording of show and reception of tv program, ignoring commands from remote controller except password; continuing to request a password. 122. The method of claim 121 wherein the program category is read from the VBI of a prerecorded tape. 123. The method of claim 121 wherein the TTD is seleαed as being restricted. 124. The method of claim 121 wherein the step of disabling die vcr and ignoring the commands applies only to the channel of the restriαed program. 125. A multiple VCR system comprising: a plurality of indexing VCRs; at least one directory controller; a bus coupled to die at least one directory controllers for two way communication between the at least one directory controller, wherein die at least one direαory controller communicates a directory to die odier directory controllers, in response to the creation or modification of the directory of the at least one directory controller. 126. The multiple VCR system of claim 125 further comprising an external device coupled to said bus. 127. The multiple VCR system of claim 126 wherein the external device is an external RAM. 128. The multiple VCR system of claim 126 wherein the external device is a printer. 129. The multiple VCR system of claim 128 wherein the printer prints the contents of a portion of the directory, in response to commands from the at least one directory controller. 130. A method for transferring a direαory from a first VCR to a second VCR comprising die steps of: reading an identification code from a tape inserted in the first VCR; retrieving the corresponding directory from a memory in the first VCR; writing the directory at a predetermined location on die tape, in response to a user seleαed command; inserting the tape into the second VCR; reading the directory from the tape in response to a second user selected command; and storing the directory in a memory in the second VCR. 131. The mediod of 130 wherein die predαermined location is an end of die tape, and further including die step of advancing die tape to the end of die tape before writing. 132. The mediod of 130 further including d e steps of: searching the tape for an identification number; if one is not found, requesting the user to identify said tape; advancing die tape to the end of die tape in response to a user identified tape of a first type; and reading the directory from the tape. 133. The mediod of T further including die steps of: receiving an ejeα command; dαermining if the directory has been changed while die tape was in the second vcr; if it has been changed, writing the new directory on die tape; and ejeαing the tape. 134. A method for advancing a tape to a user seleαed program, the tape having a plurality of programs recorded thereon, a marker in the control track at the beginning of each program, and a plurality of address marks spaced apart on the tape for identifying die position of the tape, the method comprising the steps of: (a) dαeαing an address mark; (b) dαermining die current address of the tape from the dαeαed address mark; (c) receiving a user seleαed program request; (d) retrieving from a directory the destination address of the user seleαed program; (e) calculating the number of control track markers between the current address and die destination address; (f) loading the number of control track markers into a countdown register; (g) moving, at speeds faster than d e normal tape play speed, d e tape towards the destination address; (h) monitoring the control track for markers; (i) decreasing the number stored in the countdown register in response to each monitored marker; (j) when the number in the counter is not greater than zero, moving the tape at play speed; (k) dαecting die address mark on the tape; (1) upon deteαion, reading die address mark; (m) comparing the address mark with die destination address; (n) if not equal repeating steps (e)-(m) (o) if equal, stopping the tape. 135. A method for advancing a tape to a user seleαed program, the tape having a plurality of programs recorded tiiereon, a marker in the control track at the beginning of each program, and a plurality of program number packets spaced apart on the tape for identifying the number of the program of d e tape, the method comprising the steps of: (a) dαeαing a program number packet to dαermine the current program number of the tape; (b) receiving a user seleαed program request; (c) dαermining die destination program number of the user seleαed program; (d) calculating die number of control track markers between die current program and the destination program; (e) loading die number of control track markers into a countdown register; (f) moving, at speeds faster than the normal tape play speed, die tape towards die destination address; (g) monitoring the control track for markers; (h) decreasing die number stored in the countdown register in response to each monitored marker; and (i) when die number in the countdown register is zero, stopping the tape. 136. The method of claim 135 where the step of stopping die t ape includes: reading die program number on the tape; comparing the read program number with die destination program number; and if not equal, repeating steps (d)-(i), otherwise stopping the tape. 137. The method of claim 135 where the control track markers are VISS marks. 138. A method for advancing a tape to a user selected program, the tape having a plurality of programs recorded thereon, a marker in the control track at the beginning of each program, and a plurality of program number packets spaced apart on die tape for identifying the number of the program of die tape, the method comprising the steps of: (a) receiving a user seleαed program request; (b) reading from a memory the destination program number of the user selected program; (c) reading from the memory the destination address of the user seleαed program; (d) dαeαing a program number packα to determine the current program number of die tape; (e) dαermining the current address of the tape from the detected address mark; (f) moving, at a first speed faster than the tape play speed, the tape towards die destination address; (g) monitoring die address of die tape during die movement; (h) comparing the monitored address to the destination address; (i) when there is a match, moving, at a second speed faster tiian die tape play speed, die tape towards die destination address, die second speed being less than the first speed; (j) monitoring the control track for markers; (k) upon dαeαion of die marker, reading the program number; (1) comparing the read program number with the destination program number; (m) if there is a match, stopping the movement of the tape; and (n) if there is not a match, repeating steps (d) - (m). 139. The method of claim 138 where control track markers are VISS marks. 140. A method for identifying a tape comprising the steps of: dαeαing a first user seleαed command; reading a counter in response to the dαeαed first user seleαed command to provide a first identifier; dαeαing a second user seleαed command; reading a counter in response to the deteαed second user seleαed command to provide a second identifier; and combining the first and second identifiers to form a tape identification number. 141. The method of claim 140 wherein the first and second user seleαed commands are commands from a remote control. 142. A video program guide for storing information related to a plurality of broadcasted programs comprising: (a) a recording medium having a plurality of video frames; (b) a plurality of video chapters recorded on a first group of die video frames, the video chapter comprising: (1) a plurality of video clips recorded on a first portion of die first group of the video frames, each video clip containing video information representative of a corresponding broadcasted program, and (2) a plurality of chapter menus recorded on a second portion of the first portion of die video frames, each chapter menu having a plurality of chapter video images containing video information representative of a corresponding video clip and arranged to be displayed in a plurality of cells in a grid pattern, die chapter menu having addressing information in die vertical blanking interval for associating each cells to a corresponding video clip and timing information for associating each cell to a corresponding broadcasted program; and (c) a guide menu recorded on a second group of die video frames and having a plurality of menu video images containing video information representative of a corresponding video chapter and arranged to be displayed in a plurality of cells in a grid pattern, the guide menu having addressing information in die vertical blanking interval for associating each cell to a corresponding video chapter. 143. A method for recording a broadcasted video magazine comprising a plurality of video programs and indexing information related to die video programs, the method comprising the steps of: (a) detecting video signals of a broadcasted program, the video signals comprising video images, directory information in a vertical blanking interval, and VM data packets; (b) recording a VISS mark on a control track of the video tape in response to the dαeαed VM data packα; (c) incrementing a program number in response to die dαeαed VM data packα; (d) recording die video images, the directory information, and die program number on a plurality of video frames of the video tape; and (e) repeating steps (a)-(d) for each video program. 144. An electronic TV guide comprising: a list of programs, to be displayed on a screen, repeatedly broadcasted as a video picture at seleαed intervals; a plurality of full motion picture video clips each associated with one of the listed programs and broadcasted as a video picture in the interval between the broadcasted list of programs; and information about one of the listed programs broadcasted in seleαed lines of me VBI of each video picture of a program list. 145. The electronic TV guide of claim 144 wherein the list of programs is configured in a grid widi rows and columns to form cells. 146. The electronic TV guide of claim 145 wherein the information comprises a cursor for highlighting one of the cells. 147. The electronic TV guide of claim 146 wherein the information further comprises the location of die video clip for die program listed in die highlighted cell. 148. A tape recording of an electronic TV guide wid video clips comprising: a list of programs broadcasted as a video picture in die form of a grid recorded in repeating frames on the video track of the tape at seleαed intervals; a plurality of full motion picture video clips; single video clips associated with one of the listed programs recorded in an interval between frames of listed programs; and information broadcasted in the VBI of the video picture of the list of programs recorded in the VBI of die video picture of die list of programs on the video track. 149. The tape of claim 148 wherein the information on the VBI comprises a cursor for highlighting a listed program. 150. The tape of claim 149 wherein the information in the VBI comprises the address on die tape of the video clip associated with die highlighted program. 151. The tape of claim 149 wherein the information in the VBI comprises a code associated widi die highlighted program for preprogramming a VCR for recording die highlighted program. ENHANCING OPERATIONS OF VIDEO TAPE CASSETTE PLAYERS Abstract of the Disclosure Operation of a video cassette player is facilitated by providing a VBI decoder which decodes information, such as titie, channel, date, time and lengdi of broadcast programs and utilizing the information in providing directory of the programs as well as control of the VCR. The video cassette player is also provided widi a VBI encoder for inserting control as well as directory information into the tape, either in the VBI portions of the video track or in the control track.

Inventors: HINDMAN CARL, KWOH DANIEL S, MANKOVITZ ROY J, NGAI HING Y, YUEN HENRY C, HINDMAN, CARL, KWOH, DANIEL, S., MANKOVITZ, ROY, J., NGAI, HING, Y., YUEN, HENRY, C.
Applicants: HINDMAN CARL, KWOH DANIEL S, MANKOVITZ ROY J, NGAI HING Y, YUEN HENRY C, HINDMAN, CARL, KWOH, DANIEL, S., MANKOVITZ, ROY, J., NGAI, HING, Y., YUEN, HENRY, C.
Application year: 1994
Main classification: G11B15
IPC codes: G06T1, G11B5, G11B15, G11B23, G11B27, G11B31, G11B33, H04N5, H04N7